Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
WELCOME TO BMW i.
Owner's Manual.
BMW i8 Coupe.
Thank you for choosing a BMW i.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on
the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW i. Also use
the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important informa‐
tion on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical fea‐
tures available in your BMW i. The manual also contains information designed
to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintain‐
ing the value of your BMW i.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of
the Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the on‐
board literature. Your BMW AG wishes you a safe and enjoyable drive.
3
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTES
Information ......................................................................................................................... 8
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW i at a glance ................................................................................................ 18
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit .............................................................................................................................. 34
iDrive .................................................................................................................................. 38
Voice activation system ............................................................................................... 46
General settings ............................................................................................................. 49
Owner's Manual media ................................................................................................ 60
BMW eDRIVE ................................................................................................................. 64
Safety of the hybrid system ........................................................................................ 67
CONTROLS
Opening and closing ..................................................................................................... 70
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ............................................................................ 88
Transporting children safely ....................................................................................... 95
Driving ............................................................................................................................... 99
Displays .......................................................................................................................... 116
Lights .............................................................................................................................. 134
Safety .............................................................................................................................. 139
Driving stability control systems .............................................................................. 153
Driving comfort ............................................................................................................. 157
Climate control ............................................................................................................. 170
Interior equipment ....................................................................................................... 176
Storage compartments .............................................................................................. 181
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ......................................................................... 186
Loading .......................................................................................................................... 191
Increasing the range ................................................................................................... 193
4
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle ................................................................................................... 198
Refueling ........................................................................................................................ 207
Fuel .................................................................................................................................. 210
Wheels and tires .......................................................................................................... 212
Engine oil ....................................................................................................................... 224
Coolant ........................................................................................................................... 229
Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 230
Replacing components .............................................................................................. 232
Breakdown assistance ............................................................................................... 235
Care ................................................................................................................................. 239
REFERENCE
Technical data .............................................................................................................. 246
Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 248
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................................... 250
© 2018 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US EnglishID5 II/18, 03 18 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication, see Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle, Online Owner's Manual, BMW i Driver's Guide app.
5
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
NOTES
Information .................................................................................................... 8
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a particu‐
lar topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in
the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
Manual and the following Owner's Manuals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW i Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the follow‐
ing Owner's Manuals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW i Driver’s Guide app.
Additional sources of
information
Dealer’s service center
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
questions at any time.
Internet
The Owner's Manual and general information on
BMW, for example on technology, are available
on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. Additional
information, refer to page 60.
BMW i Driver’s Guide App
The BMW i Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle. The app can be displayed on smartphones
and tablets. Additional information, refer to
page 61.
Online Owner's Manual
The Online Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle. The Online Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played in any of today's browsers. Additional
information, refer to page 62.
Seite 8
NOTES
Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Symbol Meaning
Precautions that must be followed in
order to avoid the possibility of injury
to yourself and to others as well as
serious damage to the vehicle.
Measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
"..." Texts in vehicle used to select
individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the
voice activation system.
››...‹‹ Answers generated by the voice
activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out in
the defined order.
1.
First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or alter‐
native possibilities are presented as list with bul‐
let points.
▷ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
This symbol on a vehicle component
indicates that further information on the
component is available in the Owner's Manual.
The symbols on parts of the vehicle indicate that
incorrect use of high-voltage equipment or of or‐
ange-colored high-voltage components results
in the risk of life-threatening injury from electric
shock.
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional equip‐
ment that is offered in the model series. There‐
fore, this Owner's Manual also describes and il‐
lustrates features and functions that are not
available in your vehicle, for example because of
the selected optional features or the country-
specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions and
systems.
When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Your dealer’s service center is happy to answer
any questions that you may have about the fea‐
tures and options applicable to your vehicle.
Status of the Owner's Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
icy of constant development that is conceived to
ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the
highest quality and safety standards. In rare
cases, therefore, the features described in this
Seite 9
Information
NOTES
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
Manual and the following Owner's Manuals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW i Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
For Your Own Safety
Intended use
Follow the following when using the vehicle:
▷ Owner's Manual.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the
vehicle is driven.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory documents.
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for the op‐
erating conditions and registration requirements
applying in the country of first delivery, also
known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be
operated in a different country it might be neces‐
sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the
homologation requirements in a certain country
you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for
your vehicle there. Further information on war‐
ranty is available from a dealer’s service center.
Working on the vehicle, maintenance
and repairs
Advanced technology, especially the use of high-
performance high-voltage electronics and mod‐
ern materials such as carbon, requires special
knowledge when making modifications to and
working on the vehicle, as well as customized
maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
having changes to and work on the vehicle, es‐
pecially maintenance and repair of the high-volt‐
age system and the carbon body as well as retro‐
fitting of accessories, done by an authorized
BMW i dealer’s service center. If you choose to
use another service facility, BMW recommends
use of a facility that performs work, for instance
maintenance and repair, according to BMW i
specifications with properly trained personnel, re‐
ferred to in this Owner's Manual as "another
qualified service center or repair shop".
DANGER
Improperly executed work, in particular mainte‐
nance and repair on the high-voltage system
and the carbon body as well as accessories ret‐
rofits, can lead to electric shock. There is a risk
of injury, fire and danger to life. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that the work
on the vehicle, in particular maintenance and
repair, be performed only by an authorized
BMW i dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Parts and accessories
BMW recommends the use of parts and acces‐
sory products approved by BMW.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
their use and installation are available from a
BMW dealer's service center.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested by
BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehi‐
cles.
Seite 10
NOTES
Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
sories.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individual
product from another manufacturer can be used
with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety
hazard, even if a country-specific official approval
was issued. BMW does not evaluate whether
these products are suitable for BMW vehicles
under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
California law requires vehicle manufacturers
provide the following warning:
WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automo‐
bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐
tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
pounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals
known to the State of California to cause can‐
cer. Wash your hands after handling. Used en‐
gine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passen‐
ger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine ex‐
haust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ex‐
cept as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your ve‐
hicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the follow‐
ing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating condi‐
tions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to deliver
the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is oper‐
ated under those conditions. If you wish to oper‐
ate your vehicle in another country or region, you
may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet
different prevailing operating conditions and ho‐
mologation requirements. You should also be
aware of any applicable warranty limitations or
exclusions for such country or region. In such
case, please contact Customer Relations for fur‐
ther information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road
safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures:
Seite 11
Information
NOTES
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ BMW Maintenance system.
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for
US models.
▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models.
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov‐
ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Data memory
General information
Electronic control devices are installed in the ve‐
hicle. Some of these are necessary for the vehi‐
cle to function safely or provide assistance dur‐
ing driving, for instance driver assistance
systems. Furthermore, control devices facilitate
comfort or infotainment functions.
Electronic control devices contain data memo‐
ries, which are able to temporarily or permanently
store information about the condition of the vehi‐
cle, component load, maintenance requirements,
technical events or faults.
This information generally records the state of a
component, a module, a system or the environ‐
ment, for instance:
▷ Operating states of system components,
e.g., fill levels, tire inflation pressure, battery
status.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐
vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, transverse
acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system
components, for instance lights and brakes.
▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or engage‐
ment of the stability control systems.
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain
sensor signals.
The data is required to perform the control de‐
vice functions. Furthermore, it also serves to rec‐
ognize and correct malfunctions, and helps the
vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle func‐
tions. The majority of this data is transient and is
only processed within the vehicle itself. Only a
small proportion of the data is stored in event or
fault memories and, if needed, in the vehicle key.
Reading out data
When servicing, for instance during repairs, serv‐
ice processes, warranty cases, and quality assur‐
ance measures, this technical information can be
read out from the vehicle together with the vehi‐
cle identification number. A dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop can read out the information. The socket
for OBD Onboard Diagnosis required by law in
the vehicle is used to read out the data. The data
is collected, processed, and used by the relevant
organizations in the service network. The data
documents the technical conditions of the vehi‐
cle, helps in locating faults and improving quality,
and is transferred to the vehicle manufacturer, if
needed.
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
monitoring duties to meet in line with product lia‐
bility law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle man‐
ufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle.
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be
reset when a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop performs
repair or servicing work.
Data on the scope of servicing work performed
and maintenance records are stored in the vehi‐
cle by means of the service history and transfer‐
red to the vehicle manufacturer. The vehicle
owner can contact a dealer's service center to
object to the data being stored and transferred to
the vehicle manufacturer. This objection applies
for as long as the vehicle owner remains the pro‐
prietor of the vehicle.
Seite 12
NOTES
Information
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Data entry and data transfer into the
vehicle
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some data
can be transferred into the vehicle when using
comfort and infotainment functions, for instance:
▷ Multimedia data such as music or movies for
playback in an integrated multimedia system.
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with
an integrated hands-free system or an
integrated navigation system.
▷ Entered navigation destinations.
▷ Data on the use of Internet services.
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is
found on a device that has been connected to
the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it
can be deleted at any time. This data is only
transmitted to third parties if expressly desired.
This depends on the personal settings selected
for using online services.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow‐
ing comfort and individual settings can be stored
in the vehicle and modified at any time, for in‐
stance:
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐
tions.
▷ Suspension and climate control settings.
▷ Individual settings, for instance lighting in the
car's interior.
Control via mobile devices
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile de‐
vices connected to the vehicle, for instance
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
control elements. The sound and picture from
the mobile device can be played back and dis‐
played through the multimedia system. Certain
information is transferred to the mobile device at
the same time. Depending on the type of con‐
nection, this includes, for instance position data
and other general vehicle information. This opti‐
mizes the way in which selected apps, for in‐
stance navigation or music playback, work.
There is no further interaction between the mo‐
bile device and the vehicle, for instance active
access to vehicle data. How the data will be
processed further is determined by the provider
of the particular app being used. The extent of
the possible settings depends on the respective
app and the operating system of the mobile de‐
vice.
Services
General information
If the vehicle has a wireless network connection,
this enables data to be exchanged between the
vehicle and other systems. The wireless network
connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmit‐
ter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devi‐
ces brought into the vehicle, for instance smart‐
phones. This wireless network connection
enables 'online functions' to be used. These in‐
clude online services and apps supplied by the
vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.
Services from the vehicle manufacturer
Where online services from the vehicle manufac‐
turer are concerned, the corresponding functions
are described in the appropriate place, for in‐
stance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's
website. The relevant legal information pertaining
to data protection is provided there too. Personal
data may be used to perform online services.
Data is exchanged over a secure connection,
for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle
manufacturer intended for this purpose. Any col‐
lection, processing, and use of personal data
above and beyond that needed to provide the
services must always be based on a legal per‐
mission, contractual arrangement or consent.
In addition, the vehicle manufacturer evaluates
anonymized information on transport infrastruc‐
ture and how the infotainment system is used.
This information cannot be traced back to indi‐
vidual vehicles or people. Evaluating the data en‐
Seite 13
Information
NOTES
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
ables the manufacturer to further improve its
products or services, for instance by incorporat‐
ing the most up-to-date traffic bulletins. The data
transfer feature can be deactivated in the vehicle.
Certain services and functions, some of which
are subject to a charge, can be deactivated by
the driver. It is also possible to activate or deacti‐
vate the data connection as a whole. That is, with
the exception of functions and services required
by law such as Assist systems.
Services from other providers
When using online services from other providers,
these services are the responsibility of the rele‐
vant provider and subject to their data privacy
conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐
facturer has no influence on the content ex‐
changed during this process. Information on the
way in which personal data is collected and used
in relation to services from third parties, the
scope of such data, and its purpose, can be ob‐
tained from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand‐
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were op‐
erating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better understand‐
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, for instance name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐
facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have the special equipment, can read the in‐
formation if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR.
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number can be found
under a cover under the front passenger seat.
Seite 14
NOTES
Information
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
The vehicle identification number can also be
found on the type label on the front right door
frame.
The vehicle identification number can also be
found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned and
operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in in‐
dividual problems between you, your dealer, or
BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-
related defect to Transport Canada, Defect In‐
vestigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free
hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Seite 15
Information
NOTES
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW i at a glance ............................................................................. 18
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Your BMW i at a glance
Opening and closing
Buttons on the remote control
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
4 ▷ With alarm system: panic mode
▷ Without alarm system:
Adjustable function: headlight courtesy
delay feature or stationary climate control.
Unlocking the vehicle
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, either only the driv‐
er's door or all vehicle access points are un‐
locked.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the
button of the remote control again to unlock the
other vehicle access points.
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows are opened, as long as the button
on the remote control is pressed.
Locking the vehicle
Press button on the remote control.
All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons for the central locking system
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Press the button with the doors closed.
Unlocking
Press button.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Seite 18
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW i at a glance
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the car's
interior.
Unlocking the vehicle
Before pressing the door opener button, draw
your hand across the sensor surface.
Locking the vehicle
From above, touch the surface on the side wall
with your finger for approx. 1 second.
Unlocking the tailgate
Press button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may also be
unlocked.
Seats, mirrors, and steering
wheel
Electrically adjustable seats
1 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
2 Backrest tilt
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Seite 19
Your BMW i at a glance
QUICK REFERENCE
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Adjusting the steering wheel
Manual steering wheel adjustment
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Adjust the height and reach of the steering
wheel.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Entering the rear
1.
Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold backrest forward.
Displays and control elements
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Light switch element
2 Turn signal indicator, high beams
3 Instrument cluster
4 Wipers
Indicator/warning lights
Instrument cluster
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
ety of combinations and colors.
Several lights indicate function checks and light
up only temporarily when standby state or
standby state are activated.
Driver's door
1 Locking/unlocking the vehicle
2 Opening the door
3 Tank venting
Seite 20
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW i at a glance
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
4 Exterior mirrors
5 Power windows
All around the selector lever
1 Selector lever
2 Parking brake
3 Controller
4 Parking assistance systems
5 Driving Dynamics Control
6 Start/Stop button
iDrive
Concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. These functions can be operated via
the Controller or touchscreen.
Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: display all menu items of
the main menu.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open destination input menu for navi‐
gation.
Open navigation map.
Press once: open the previous display.
Press and hold: open the menus used
last.
Open the Options menu.
Voice activation
Using the voice activation system
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press button on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol in the instrument cluster and on
the Control Display indicates that the voice acti‐
vation system is active.
If no other commands are possible, operate the
function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
Seite 21
Your BMW i at a glance
QUICK REFERENCE
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Help on the voice activation system
▷ To have information on the operating princi‐
ple of the voice activation system read out
loud: ›General information on voice control‹.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹.
Information on Emergency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a
phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button close to the interior
mirror.
Driving
Drive-ready state
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches standby state on or off.
Drive-ready state is switched on
when you depress the brake
pedal while pressing the Start/
Stop button.
Activating/deactivating drive-ready state
Activating
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The drive-ready state is active: electric driving is
possible, or the engine can be started.
Deactivating
1.
Apply brake and engage the selector lever in
position P P.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Displays
READY indicates drive-ready
state.
When drive-ready state is
switched on, the light on the
Start/Stop button lights up blue.
In addition, a signal sounds.
Drive-ready state in detail
Concept
The following are the different drive-ready state
variants:
▷ Electric drive-ready state
The vehicle is powered by the electric motor.
▷ Starting the combustion engine
The vehicle is powered by the combustion
engine.
Parking brake
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED and indicator light light up.
Releasing
With the ignition switched on:
Press the switch while pressing on the
brake pedal.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Seite 22
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW i at a glance
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Steptronic Sport transmission
Engaging the transmission position
Press button to:
▷ Engage R.
▷ Shift out of P.
If the vehicle is stationary, press on the brake
pedal at the same time to change out of P or N.
Engaging D, R and N
▷ N is Neutral.
▷ D is Drive, the driving position.
▷ Reverse R.
The selector lever returns to the center position
in each case.
Engaging P
Press button P.
Sport/manual mode
Activate the Sport program of the vehicle:
Press the selector lever to the left out of selector
lever position D.
Manual mode:
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
Seite 23
Your BMW i at a glance
QUICK REFERENCE
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
High beams, headlight flasher, turn
signal, roadside parking light
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Turn signal
▷ On: press the lever past the resistance point.
▷ Off: lightly tap the lever to the resistance
point.
▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the
lever up or down.
▷ Brief signaling: press the lever to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there for as long as you
want the turn signal to flash.
Roadside parking light
Illuminate the vehicle on one side.
▷ On: with standby state switched off, press the
lever either up or down past the resistance
point for approx. 2 seconds.
▷ Off: briefly press the lever to the resistance
point in the opposite direction.
Lights and lighting
Light functions
Symbol Function
Automatic headlight control.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Seite 24
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW i at a glance
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe
Switching on
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.
Brief wipe and switching off
Push wiper lever down.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
Press button on the wiper lever.
Adjusting the sensitivity:
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
Seite 25
Your BMW i at a glance
QUICK REFERENCE
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Climate control
Automatic climate control
Button Function
Temperature.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
Automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol AUC/recirculated-air mode.
Control the air flow, manual.
Control the manual air distribu‐
tion.
SYNC program.
Defrost and defog the window.
Rear window defroster.
Switch off the system.
Infotainment
Radio
Control elements
1 Change waveband
2 Sound output on/off, volume
3 Programmable memory buttons
4 Change station/track
Navigation destination entry
Entering a destination via address
State/province
1.
"Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. "State/Province?"
4. Move the Controller to the right to select the
state from the list.
Entering the address
The address can be entered in any order.
Example: entering the address via the town/city
1.
"City/Postal code?"
2. Enter the town/city.
The list is narrowed down further with each
entry.
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select a town/city from the list.
Seite 26
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW i at a glance
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
5. If necessary, enter the street.
6. Select the street as you would the town/city.
7. If necessary, enter a house number.
8. Select the symbol.
9. Select a house number or range of house
numbers from the list.
Starting destination guidance
"Start guidance"
If only the town/city was entered: destination
guidance is started to the town/city center.
Connecting a mobile phone
After the mobile phone is connected once to the
vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using
iDrive, the steering wheel buttons and spoken in‐
structions.
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select the functions for which the mobile
phone is to be used.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. To perform additional steps on the mobile
phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's
manual: e.g., search for or connect the Blue‐
tooth device or a new device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display. Select the Blue‐
tooth name of the vehicle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the device
and on the Control Display.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐
ber on the device and via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in the
device list.
The mobile phone is connected and will appear
at the top of the list of mobile phones.
Using the phone
Accepting a call
Incoming call can be accepted via iDrive or the
button on the steering wheel.
Via iDrive
"Accept"
Via the button on the steering wheel
Press button.
Via the instrument cluster
Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to
select: "Accept"
Dialing a number
1.
"Communication"
2. "Dial number"
3. Enter the numbers.
4. Select the symbol. The connection is es‐
tablished via the mobile phone to which this
function has been assigned.
If connection is to be set up via the additional
phone:
1. Press button.
2. "Call via"
Seite 27
Your BMW i at a glance
QUICK REFERENCE
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Charging and refueling the
vehicle
Charging the vehicle
Connecting the charging cable
To connect, engage selector lever position P,
deactivate drive-ready state, and unlock the vehi‐
cle. Set the parking brake, if needed.
1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow.
2. Remove cover of the charging cable plug, if
needed.
3. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or Level 2 charging cable
to the port on the charging station.
4. Insert the charging cable plug corresponding
to the charging socket, and push it in until it
engages.
Removing
When the charging process is active and the ve‐
hicle is locked, the charging cable is locked. Un‐
lock the vehicle before removing the cable.
When the charging process is completed, the
charging cable is automatically unlocked.
If necessary, clean the area between charging
socket flap and charging socket, for instance
from snow, before removing it.
1.
Unlock the vehicle by remote control if it is
locked.
Charging cable is unlocked.
2. Press the release button on the handle, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the charging cable at the
gripping areas.
Charging process is interrupted.
3. Remove the charging cable from the charg‐
ing socket, arrow 2.
4. Close the charging socket flap.
5. Attach cover of the charging cable plug, if
needed.
6. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the
household socket or Level 2 charging cable
from the port on the charging station as
needed.
7. Stow the charging cable.
At a charging station, insert the permanently
installed charging cable in the place provided
for it.
Always keep charging socket clean and un‐
obstructed.
Keep the charging socket flap closed when
the charging socket is not used.
Refueling
Tank venting
In the fuel tank, excess pressure can build up
due to gasoline vapors which are dissipated be‐
fore the fuel cap is opened.
The button is located on the driver's side on the
door armrest.
1.
Switch off drive-ready state.
Seite 28
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW i at a glance
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
2. Press button to start the pressure
equalization.
The status of the tank venting is displayed in
the instrument cluster. In rare cases, the tank
venting can last several minutes.
If the tank venting has been completed, a
message is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter. The fuel cap is released for opening.
3. Open the fuel filler flap.
If the fuel filler flap is not opened within
10 minutes after the fuel cap is released, the
fuel filler flap relocks. Press button again.
Fuel cap
1.
Press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap to
open it.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Gasoline
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without met‐
allic additives.
Information on the recommended fuel grade can
be found in the Owner's Manual.
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The pressure values for tire sizes approved by
the manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type are on the door pillar of the driver's door.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and
correct it as needed:
▷ At least twice a month.
▷ Before embarking on an extended trip.
Electronic oil measurement
Requirements
Depending on the previous displays, the status
display appears when the engine is running or af‐
ter the vehicle has been driven for at least 30 mi‐
nutes.
Displaying the engine oil level
On the Control Display:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention to
these messages.
Seite 29
Your BMW i at a glance
QUICK REFERENCE
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Adding engine oil
General information
Switch off standby state and safely park the vehi‐
cle before engine oil is added.
Adding
After being requested to do so by a message on
the Control Display:
Observe the quantity to be added in the mes‐
sage.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Observe recommended engine oil types.
Providing assistance
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
Breakdown assistance
Roadside Assistance
This service can be reached around the clock in
many countries.
Roadside Assistance
Via iDrive:
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. "BMW i Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established with Road‐
side Assistance.
Warning triangle, first-aid kit
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in the bottom of
the cargo area. Release the Velcro® fastener to
remove it.
Seite 30
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW i at a glance
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
First-aid kit
The first-aid kit is located behind the left-hand
cover in the cargo area. To open, pull on the han‐
dle.
ConnectedDrive
Concierge service
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Many
hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Con‐
cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
the optional BMW Assist Response Center.
1.
"ConnectedDrive"
2. "Concierge"
Teleservices
Teleservices are services that help to maintain
vehicle mobility.
Depending on the equipment version, Teleservi‐
ces comprise the following services:
▷ Roadside Assistance.
▷ Service Request.
▷ Automatic Service Request.
▷ Teleservice Report.
▷ Teleservice Battery Guard.
▷ Your dealer’s service center.
Seite 31
Your BMW i at a glance
QUICK REFERENCE
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit ........................................................................................................ 34
iDrive ............................................................................................................ 38
Voice activation system ............................................................................ 46
General settings ......................................................................................... 49
Owner's Manual media ............................................................................. 60
BMW eDRIVE ............................................................................................. 64
Safety of the hybrid system ..................................................................... 67
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Open tailgate 80
2 Power windows 86
3 Exterior mirror operation 92
4 Open fuel filler flap,
Tank vent 207
5 Lock, unlock vehicle 78
6 Opening the door
7 Lights
Light switch 134
Lights off
Daytime running lights 136
Parking lights 134
Low beams 134
Seite 34
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Automatic headlight control 135
High-beam Assistant 136
Instrument lighting 137
8 Left steering column stalk
Turn signal 106
High beams, headlight flasher 106
High-beam Assistant 136
Roadside parking lights 134
Onboard Computer 128
9 Shift paddles 113
10 Steering wheel buttons, left
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 157
Cruise control: store speed
Cruise control: resume speed
Cruise control rocker switch
11 Instrument cluster 116
12 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source
Volume
Voice activation 46
Telephone
Thumbwheel for selection lists 128
13 Right steering column stalk
Wipers 107
Rain sensor 108
Clean the windshield and head‐
lights 108
14 Horn, entire surface
15 Adjust the steering wheel 94
Seite 35
Cockpit
AT A GLANCE
35
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 38
2 Ventilation 173
3 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐
tion 8
4 Glove compartment 181
5 Climate control 170
6 Steptronic Sport transmission 110
7 Parking brake 105
8 Controller with buttons 39
9 PDC Park Distance Control 160
Rearview camera 163
Surround View 163
Side View 168
10 Driving Dynamics Control 155
11 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 153
12 Start/Stop button 99
Max eDRIVE 103
13 Intelligent Safety 145
14 Hazard warning system 235
Seite 36
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
iDrive
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Concept
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. These functions can be operated via
the Controller or touchscreen.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the systems or devices when the traf‐
fic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use
the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.
Control elements
Overview
1 Control Display with touchscreen
2 Controller with buttons and touchpad
Control Display
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐
structions, refer to page 242.
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense solar
radiation, the brightness may be reduced down
to complete deactivation. Once the temperature
is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐
ditioning, the normal functions are restored.
Safety information
NOTE
Objects in the area in the front of the Control
Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐
play. There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not place objects in the area in front of the
Control Display.
Seite 38
AT A GLANCE
iDrive
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Switching on/off automatically
The Control Display is switched on automatically
after unlocking.
In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐
eration is performed on the vehicle for several
minutes.
Switching on/off manually
The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.
1.
Press button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐
troller to switch it back on again.
Controller with navigation system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller, refer to page 43.
Operation
▷ Turn.
▷ Press.
▷ Move in four directions.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: call up main menu.
Press twice: display all menu items of
the main menu.
Open the Communication menu.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open destination input menu for navi‐
gation.
Open navigation map.
Press once: open the previous display.
Press and hold: open the menus used
last.
Open the Options menu.
Seite 39
iDrive
AT A GLANCE
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Operating with the Controller
Opening the main menu
Press button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Adapting the main menu
1. Press the button twice.
All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
played.
2. Select a menu item.
3. To move the menu item to the desired posi‐
tion, tilt the Controller to the right or left.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1.
Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for instance
"iDrive settings".
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"iDrive settings", a new display appears.
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
Closes the current display and shows the
previous display.
▷
Press button.
The previous display opens.
▷ Move the Controller to the right.
New display is opened.
A white arrow indicates that additional displays
can be called up.
Opening recently used menus
The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press and hold this button.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
The Options menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main menu,
for instance for "Media/Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for the
selected menu, for instance "Save station".
Changing settings
1.
Select a field.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
displayed.
3. Press the Controller.
Seite 40
AT A GLANCE
iDrive
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered via the
Controller.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Input
1.
Turn the Controller: select letters or numbers.
2. : confirm entry.
Symbol Function
Press the Controller: delete letters or
number.
Hold the Controller down: delete all
letters or numbers.
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters and
numbers.
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the choice
is narrowed down with every letter entered and
letters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry for
which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
tered in all languages that are available in
iDrive.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,
the letters for which there is an entry are dis‐
played at the left edge.
1.
Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.
All letters for which there are entries are dis‐
played on the left edge.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
played.
Operating via touchscreen
General information
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
Touch screen with your fingers. Do not use any
objects.
Opening the main menu
Tap on symbol.
Seite 41
iDrive
AT A GLANCE
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Adapting the main menu
1.
Tap on symbol.
All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
played.
2. Drag the menu item to the desired position
on the right or left.
Selecting menu items
Tap desired menu item.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for instance
"iDrive settings".
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
A white arrow indicates that additional displays
can be called up.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap on symbol.
New display is opened.
Changing settings
Settings such as volumes can be changed via
the touchscreen.
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or left,
until the desired setting is displayed.
▷ , Tap on symbol.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
Controller or the touchscreen.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: delete the letter
or number.
Tapping and holding the symbol for
an extended period: delete all letters
or numbers.
Seite 42
AT A GLANCE
iDrive
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Operating navigation map
The navigation map can be moved with the
touchscreen.
Function Operation
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin‐
gers.
Touchpad
General information
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller.
Selecting functions
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Touchpad"
4. Select desired setting:
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ "Map": using the map.
▷ "Search fields": write letters without se‐
lecting the list field.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the be‐
ginning. When entering, pay attention to the fol‐
lowing:
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. To
make entries, it may be necessary to change
between upper and lower-case letters, num‐
bers and characters, refer to page 41.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the
Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized. The set language deter‐
mines what input is possible. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the Control‐
ler.
▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on the
touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, swipe to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right in
the lower area of the touchpad.
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be moved
via the touchpad.
Function Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
rection.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out on the touch‐
pad with fingers.
Display menu. Tap once.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed in several
menus on the right side of the split screen, for in‐
stance information from the Onboard Computer.
Seite 43
iDrive
AT A GLANCE
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
when switching to another menu.
Switching the split screen on/off
1.
Press button.
2. "Split screen"
Selecting the display
The display can be selected in menus, where the
split screen is supported.
1.
Move the Controller to the right until the split
screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. Select the desired setting.
Specifying the number of displays
It is possible to specify the number of displays.
1.
Move the Controller to the right until the split
screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. Move the Controller to the left.
Status information
General information
The status field can be found in the upper area of
the Control Display. Status information is dis‐
played in the form of symbols.
Status field symbols
Radio
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Telephone
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Network search.
Cellular network is not available.
The critical charge state of the mobile
phone has been reached.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
Reminder.
Sending not possible.
Contacts are loaded.
Entertainment
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Online Entertainment.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
The sound output has been switched
off.
Seite 44
AT A GLANCE
iDrive
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Symbol Meaning
Encrypted connection not active.
Request for the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
Checking the current vehicle position.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐
tinations, phone numbers and menu entries.
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.
Storing a function
1.
Select function via iDrive.
2.
Press and hold the desired button
until a signal sounds.
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately. This means,
for instance that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or
use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments
1.
Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for ap‐
prox. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Seite 45
iDrive
AT A GLANCE
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Concept
Most functions displayed on the Control Display
can be operated by voice commands via the
voice activation system. The system supports
you with announcements during input.
General information
▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐
hicle is stationary can only be operated via
the voice activation system to a limited ex‐
tent.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal in‐
structions to use with the voice activation
system.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis,
and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of the
voice activation system.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system so
that the spoken commands can be identified.
To set the language, refer to page 49.
Using the voice activation
system
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press button on the steering wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol in the instrument cluster and on
the Control Display indicates that the voice acti‐
vation system is active.
If no other commands are possible, operate the
function via iDrive.
Terminating the voice activation
system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
Using a smartphone via voice
activation
A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be
used via voice activation.
Activate voice command response on the smart‐
phone for this purpose.
1. Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
Seite 46
AT A GLANCE
Voice activation system
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Voice command response is activated on the
smartphone.
2.
Release the button.
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
If it was not possible to activate voice command
response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears
on the Control Display.
Possible commands
General information
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
voiced as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be spo‐
ken.
You may select list entries such as phone list en‐
tries via voice activation. Read these list entries
out loud exactly as they are shown in the respec‐
tive list.
Displaying possible commands
The following is displayed in the top area of the
Control Display:
▷ Some possible commands for the current
menu.
▷ Some possible commands from other me‐
nus.
▷ Status of the voice recognition.
▷ Encrypted connection is not available.
Help on the voice activation system
▷ To have information on the operating princi‐
ple of the voice activation system read out
loud: ›General information on voice control‹.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹.
Example: opening the tone
settings
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output, if
needed.
2.
Press button on the steering wheel.
3. ›Media and radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Settings
Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dialog or
a short version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays back
short messages in abbreviated form.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech mode:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Selecting the input language
For some languages, the input language can be
selected.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Voice control:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Seite 47
Voice activation system
AT A GLANCE
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Activating voice recognition via the
server
The voice recognition feature via the server pro‐
vides a dictation function and a natural method of
entering destinations while improving the quality
of voice recognition. To use the functions, data is
transmitted to a service provider and locally
stored there.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition"
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
voice activation system. The function can be de‐
activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐
rupted, for instance due to background noise or
talking.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speaking during voice output"
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the vol‐
ume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Information on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a
phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 235,
close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Keep the doors and windows closed to pre‐
vent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Seite 48
AT A GLANCE
Voice activation system
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
General settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Language
Setting the language
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer
to page 47.
Time
Setting the time zone
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are
displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes
are displayed.
8. Press the Controller.
Setting the time format
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
Seite 49
General settings
AT A GLANCE
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
3. "Date and time"
4. "Automatic time setting"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Date
Setting the date
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Make the settings for the month and year.
Setting the date format
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the units of
measurement
You can set the units of measurement for some
values, for example, fuel consumption, distances
and temperature.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Activating/deactivating the
display of the current vehicle
position
Concept
If vehicle location has been activated, the current
vehicle position can be displayed in the BMW
Connected app or in the ConnectedDrive cus‐
tomer portal.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Vehicle tracking"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
Activating/deactivating popup
windows
For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be activated
or deactivated.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Seite 50
AT A GLANCE
General settings
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Control Display
Brightness
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Screensaver
If no settings are made via iDrive, a screensaver
will be displayed after an adjustable time.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Screensaver"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Selecting the contents of the main
menu
For some menu items of the main menu, the dis‐
played contents can be selected.
1. Press button.
2. "Contents of main menu"
3. Select the desired menu and the desired
content.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Messages
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐
ing in the vehicle in list form.
General information
The following messages can be displayed:
▷ Traffic messages.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Communication messages, for example e-
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
▷ Service requirements messages.
Messages are additionally displayed in the status
field.
Retrieving messages
Via iDrive:
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
The respective menu is opened, where the mes‐
sage is displayed.
Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control messages,
can be deleted from the list. Check Control mes‐
sages are displayed as long as they are relevant.
Via iDrive:
1.
"Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
3.
Press button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
Seite 51
General settings
AT A GLANCE
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Settings
The following settings can be adjusted:
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
sages will be permitted.
▷ Sort the messages according to date or prior‐
ity.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting.
Data protection
Data transfer
Concept
The vehicle offers different functions, whose use
requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐
vider. The data transfer can be deactivated for
some functions.
General information
With data transfer deactivated, the respective
function cannot be used.
Only make these settings while stationary.
Activating/deactivating the data transfer
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1.
Switch on standby state.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal data in the vehicle
Concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐
sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This
personal data can be permanently deleted using
iDrive.
General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations.
▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Control
Display.
Via iDrive:
1.
Switch on standby state.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Delete personal data"
6. "Delete personal data"
7. "OK"
8. Exit and lock the vehicle.
Seite 52
AT A GLANCE
General settings
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com‐
pleted.
If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the dele‐
tion.
Canceling deletion
Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.
Connections
Concept
Various connection types are available for using
mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection
type to select depends on the mobile device and
the desired function.
General information
The following overview shows possible functions
and the suitable connection types for them. The
scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐
vice.
Function Connection
type
Making calls via the hands-free
system.
Using phone functions via iDrive.
Using the smartphone Office
functions.
Bluetooth.
Playing music from the smart‐
phone or the audio player.
Bluetooth or
USB.
Using compatible apps via
iDrive.
Bluetooth or
USB.
USB storage device:
Exporting and importing driver
profiles.
Performing software updates.
Exporting and importing stored
trips.
Playing music.
USB.
Function Connection
type
Playing videos from the smart‐
phone or the USB storage de‐
vice.
USB.
Use Apple Carplay apps via
iDrive and voice operation.
Bluetooth
and WiFi.
The following connection types require one-time
pairing with the vehicle:
▷ Bluetooth.
▷ Internet hotspot.
▷ Apple CarPlay.
Paired devices are automatically recognized later
on and connected to the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the systems or devices when the traf‐
fic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use
the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.
Compatible devices
General information
Information on mobile devices compatible with
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/
bluetooth.
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
or deviating software versions.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
When looking for compatible devices, you may
have to state the vehicle identification number
Seite 53
General settings
AT A GLANCE
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
and the software part number. These numbers
can be displayed in the vehicle.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
A software update, refer to page 58, can be
performed, if needed.
Bluetooth connection
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 53, with
Bluetooth interface.
▷ The remote control is in the vehicle.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and in
the vehicle, refer to page 54.
▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may
be required on the device; refer to the own‐
er's manual of the device.
Switching on Bluetooth
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"
Activating/deactivating telephone
functions
To use all supported functions of a mobile
phone, the following functions must be activated
prior to pairing.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Office"
Activate function to transmit short mes‐
sages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, notes,
and reminders to the vehicle. Costs can
be incurred by transmitting all data to the
vehicle.
▷ "Contact images"
Activate function to show the contact pic‐
tures.
6. Move the Controller to the left.
Pairing the mobile device with the vehicle
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select the functions for which the device will
be used:
▷ "Telephone"
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
▷ "Apps"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity of
the mobile device.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile device display.
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number
must be entered.
Seite 54
AT A GLANCE
General settings
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ Compare the control number displayed
on the Control Display with the control
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the device
and on the Control Display.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐
ber on the device and via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in the
device list, refer to page 57.
If connection was not successful: Frequently
Asked Questions, refer to page 55.
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected.
In this case, the following explanations can help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
connected?
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections
with other devices.
Delete all known Bluetooth connections from
the device list on the mobile phone and start
a new device search.
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or
has only a limited remaining battery life.
Charge mobile phone.
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not
function anymore.
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Too high or too low ambient temperatures for
mobile phone operation.
Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme
ambient temperatures.
Why can phone functions not be used via iDrive?
▷ The mobile phone may not be properly con‐
figured, for instance as Bluetooth audio de‐
vice.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
phone or additional phone function.
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
played or why are they incomplete?
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book entries
of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
from social networks.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐
stance due to stored information such as
notes.
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
audio source or as telephone.
Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with the telephone or additional phone func‐
tion.
How can the phone connection quality be im‐
proved?
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on
the mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the center
console.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, contact the
hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Seite 55
General settings
AT A GLANCE
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
USB connection
General information
Mobile devices with a USB port are connected to
the USB interface.
▷ Mobile phones.
The snap-in adapter features a separate USB
port that is automatically connected when a
compatible mobile phone is inserted.
▷ Audio devices with USB port, for instance
MP3 player.
▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32
and exFAT are the recommended formats.
The following applications are possible:
▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, refer
to page 81.
▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
▷ Playing videos via USB video.
▷ Loading of software updates, refer to
page 58.
Follow the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐
tor into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
chanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB media avail‐
able on the market, it cannot be guaranteed
that every device is operable on the vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
peratures; refer to the owner's manual of the
device.
▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐
niques, proper playback of the media stored
on the USB storage device cannot be guar‐
anteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB storage device will be sup‐
plied with charging current via the USB inter‐
face if the device supports this.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB storage device via
the onboard socket, when it is connected to
the USB interface.
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device is
being used, settings may be required on the
USB storage device, refer to the owner's
manual of the device.
Not compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Functional requirement
Compatible device, refer to page 53, with USB
interface.
Connecting the device
Connect the USB storage device using a suitable
adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
page 179.
The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐
vice list, refer to page 57.
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
and iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 53.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are
switched on on the iPhone.
Seite 56
AT A GLANCE
General settings
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
▷ "Bluetooth®"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing iPhone with CarPlay
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle, refer
to page 54.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list, refer to page 57.
Operation
For more information, see the Integrated Own‐
er's Manual, Online Owner's Manual, BMW i
Driver's Guide app or the Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication.
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected.
In this case, the following explanations can help:
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple
CarPlay. When a new connection is established,
CarPlay can no longer be selected.
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device
list.
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned
from the list of stored vehicles under Blue‐
tooth and under WiFi.
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and the
required function is still not available: contact the
hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Managing mobile devices
General information
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐
matically recognized and reconnected when
standby state is switched on.
▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the
mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle
after recognition.
▷ For some devices, certain settings may be
necessary, for instance authorization, see
owner's manual of the device.
Displaying the device list
All devices paired or connected with the vehicle
are displayed in the device list.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
A symbol indicates, for which function a device is
used.
Symbol Function
"Telephone"
"Additional telephone"
"Bluetooth® audio"
"Apps"
"Apple CarPlay"
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
Seite 57
General settings
AT A GLANCE
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
5. Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device, the function
will be deactivated where appropriate for a de‐
vice that is already connected and the device will
be disconnected.
Disconnecting the device
The connection of the device to the vehicle is
disconnected.
The device remains paired and can be con‐
nected again, refer to page 58.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"
Connecting the device
A disconnected device can be reconnected.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"
The functions that were assigned to the device
before disconnecting are assigned to the device
when it is reconnected. If the device is already
connected, these functions are deactivated.
Deleting the device
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"
The device is disconnected and removed from
the device list.
Swapping the telephone and additional
phone
If two mobile phones are connected to the vehi‐
cle, the functions of the phone and additional
phone can be switched.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
Software update
General information
The vehicle supports a large number of mobile
devices, for instance mobile phones and MP3
players. Software updates are available for many
of the supported devices. The vehicle is main‐
tained up-to-date via regular vehicle software up‐
dates.
Updates and related current information is availa‐
ble at www.bmw.com/update.
Displaying the installed software version
The software version installed in the vehicle is
displayed.
Seite 58
AT A GLANCE
General settings
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Show current version"
If an update has been carried out before, select
the desired version to display additional informa‐
tion.
Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the ve‐
hicle is stationary.
Via iDrive:
1.
Store the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB storage device to a USB
interface, refer to page 179.
3. "My Vehicle"
4. "iDrive settings"
5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
10.Wait for the update to complete.
11.Confirm system restart.
Restoring the software version
The software version before the last software
update and the version before the first software
update can be restored.
The software may only be restored when the ve‐
hicle is stationary.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5.
▷ "Previous version"
The previous software version is restored.
▷ "Default software settings"
The first software version is restored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. Confirm system restart.
Seite 59
General settings
AT A GLANCE
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Owner's Manual media
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
You can use various media formats to call up the
content in the Owner's Manual. The following
Owner's Manual media formats are available:
▷ Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 60.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle, re‐
fer to page 60.
▷ BMW i Driver’s Guide app, refer to page 61.
▷ Online Owner's Manual, refer to page 62.
There are different features, refer to page 63,
in each of the different media formats.
Printed Owner's Manual
Concept
The printed Owner's Manual describes all stand‐
ard, country-specific, and optional features of‐
fered with the series.
General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display.
Selecting the Owner's Manual
1.
Press button.
2. "My Vehicle"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select the required method of accessing the
contents.
Scrolling through the owner's manual
Turn the Controller, until the next or previous
contents are displayed.
Context help
General information
The section of the Owner's Manual relating to
the function that is currently selected can be dis‐
played directly.
Opening via iDrive
Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:
1. Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
Seite 60
AT A GLANCE
Owner's Manual media
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Opening when a Check Control message
is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and
to alternate between the two displays:
1.
Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4.
Press button again to return to last dis‐
played function.
5.
Press button to return to the page of
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens
a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The jumps into the Owner's Manual can be
stored on the programmable memory buttons,
refer to page 45, and called up directly.
Storing
1.
Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Animations"
2.
Press desired programmable mem‐
ory button and hold for more than 2 seconds.
Executing
Press the corresponding button.
The owner's manual is directly dis‐
played at the selected entry point.
BMW i Driver's Guide app
Concept
The BMW i Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle.
The app can be displayed on smartphones and
tablets.
General information
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
tries as an app. Additional information on the In‐
ternet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_i_drivers_guide
Entering the vehicle identification number filters
the contents.
Vehicles
It is possible to store Owner's Manuals for vari‐
ous vehicles in the app.
It is also possible to test the app using a demon‐
stration vehicle.
Operating systems and language
The app is available for the iOS and Android op‐
erating systems.
The Owner's Manual is downloaded in the lan‐
guage of the device.
Seite 61
Owner's Manual media
AT A GLANCE
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Online Owner's Manual
Concept
The Online Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle.
The Online Owner's Manual can be displayed in
any of today's browsers.
General information
The Online Owner's Manual is available in many
countries. An account on the customer portal
may be required.
Entering the vehicle identification number filters
the contents.
Vehicles
It is possible to store several individual Owner's
Manuals for various vehicles.
Language
The language is based on whichever language is
set in the operating system.
Printing
You can use the print function for automatically
formatting and printing out individual chapters.
Media components
General information
The following components are not available to
the same extent in all media formats.
Additional information on availability, refer to
page 63.
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides information
on how to operate the vehicle, how to use basic
vehicle functions and what to do in case of a
breakdown.
Search by illustrations
Based on illustrations, image search provides in‐
formation and descriptions. This is helpful when
the terminology for a feature is not at hand.
Frequently asked questions
This chapter provides answers to frequently
asked questions about your vehicle and helpful
links to additional information.
Quick links
The chapter on quick links explains the most im‐
portant information and operating instructions on
the basis of various situations.
Videos
The videos explain the main functions of the sys‐
tems.
Smart Scan
You can use Smart Scan to scan various symbols
in the vehicle. After a brief explanation of the
symbol in question appears, it is then possible to
display the chapter directly.
Smart Scan is only available for the iOS operat‐
ing system.
Keyword search
You can use keywords to search for information
and descriptions in the media.
Seite 62
AT A GLANCE
Owner's Manual media
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Key features
Printed Integrated APP Online
All equipment included. X — — —
Equipment included in vehicle. — X X X
Quick Reference Guide. X X X X
Search by illustrations. — X X X
Frequently asked questions. — — X X
Quick links. — — X X
Videos. — X X X
Smart Scan. — — X —
Keyword search. X X X X
X: included.
—: not included.
Seite 63
Owner's Manual media
AT A GLANCE
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
BMW eDRIVE
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
BMW eDRIVE
Special features of the BMW i
High-voltage system
This BMW i is a hybrid vehicle. In addition to the
combustion engine, the vehicle features a high-
voltage system that consists of an electric motor
and a high-voltage battery among other things.
Carbon body
The vehicle consists of the functional units:
▷ Drive module of aluminum.
▷ Life module of carbon fiber reinforced plastic,
CFRP.
Overview
1 Vehicle battery
2 Electrical drive unit
3 High-voltage battery
4 Fuel filler flap
5 Combustion engine
6 Charging socket
Concept
The hybrid system makes it possible to optimize
fuel consumption and driving characteristics.
An electric motor assists the combustion engine.
In certain driving situations, the vehicle can also
be driven using only electric power, thereby re‐
ducing fuel consumption.
In addition to this, the electric motor acts like an
alternator: during braking and coasting, the elec‐
tric motor converts the vehicle's kinetic energy
into electricity. The current is stored in the high-
voltage battery and is used to drive the electric
motor.
Functions
Assistance from the electric motor:
ASSIST and eBOOST
Driving off and accelerating require a lot of en‐
ergy. To reduce fuel consumption during high
acceleration and to optimize acceleration, the
Seite 64
AT A GLANCE
BMW eDRIVE
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
electric motor supports the combustion engine.
For this purpose, the electric motor is supplied
by the high-voltage battery.
Electric driving: ePOWER
Under certain conditions, refer to page 102, the
vehicle is powered only by the electric motor.
Variable drive configuration
The electric motor drives the front axle and the
combustion engine the rear axle. Depending on
the operating condition, the vehicle has the op‐
tions of front-wheel drive, rear-wheel drive or
bundled for four-wheel drive.
Follow instructions for electric driving eDRIVE,
refer to page 102, driving with the combustion
engine DRIVE, refer to page 104, and driving
stability, refer to page 153.
Acoustic pedestrian protection
Depending on the country-specific version, the
system generates a continuous driving noise
during electric driving at low speeds.
Driving with the combustion engine:
POWER
The combustion engine provides the perform‐
ance to move the vehicle. If necessary, the high-
voltage battery is charged at the same time.
The hybrid system always starts the combustion
engine automatically.
Energy recovery: CHARGE
The high-voltage battery is charged while driving
through energy recovery.
The electric motor acts as a generator and con‐
verts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electri‐
cal energy.
Charging can take place in various situations
while the vehicle is in motion:
▷ When the vehicle is rolling if the accelerator
pedal is not pressed.
▷ During vehicle braking.
When exerting gentle pressure on the brakes,
the vehicle is only braked by the electric motor.
When the brake pedal is depressed further, the
brake system is activated additionally. This is
why only part of the brake energy is used to
charge the high-voltage battery when exerting
firm pressure on the brake.
The mark in the instrument cluster is located
within the CHARGE range.
Sensible driving and early speed reduction are
important to make full use of the energy recovery
feature.
Display
The displays of the hybrid system, refer to
page 118, provide information about the current
state of the drive and show the system activity in
a chart.
Energy-saving driving
To store energy while driving, read the following
descriptions:
Before driving
eDRIVE allows using the air conditioner even be‐
fore driving off. The stationary climate control, re‐
fer to page 174, provides more range than using
full air conditioning while driving.
Parked vehicle ventilation during the charging
process can provide maximum range when driv‐
ing off.
During driving
▷ General driving tips, refer to page 193, for in‐
creasing the range.
▷ Use the eDRIVE system efficiently, refer to
page 186, for an optimized driving style.
▷ ECO PRO driving mode, refer to page 194,
for increasing the range.
▷ Display of hybrid system utilization, refer to
page 119.
▷ Information on saving fuel, refer to page 193,
for reducing fuel consumption.
Seite 65
BMW eDRIVE
AT A GLANCE
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
After the trip
▷ Charge vehicle, refer to page 198, and plan
next trip.
▷ Prepare for long downtimes, refer to
page 242.
BMW i Remote app
A special BMW i Remote App allows you to con‐
trol and display certain vehicle functions using a
smartphone.
Safety of the hybrid system
Follow the information on safety, refer to
page 67.
Long-term vehicle storage
Observe the information on vehicle storage and
for longer idle periods, refer to page 242.
Seite 66
AT A GLANCE
BMW eDRIVE
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Safety of the hybrid system
Safety of the hybrid system
Working on the vehicle
DANGER
Improperly executed work, in particular mainte‐
nance and repair on the high-voltage system
and the carbon body as well as accessories ret‐
rofits, can lead to electric shock. There is a risk
of injury, fire and danger to life. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle recommends that the work
on the vehicle, in particular maintenance and
repair, be performed only by an authorized
BMW i dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Contact with water
The high-voltage system is typically safe even in
the following example situations:
▷ Water in the floor area, for instance after a
rainstorm when the roof was kept open.
▷ Vehicle is in water but only up to the allowed
height.
▷ Fluid escapes in the cargo area.
Automatic deactivation
If an accident occurs, the high-voltage system is
switched off automatically to prevent risk of dan‐
ger to occupants and other traffic.
Read the information on What to do after an ac‐
cident, refer to page 238.
Seite 67
Safety of the hybrid system
AT A GLANCE
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
CONTROLS
Opening and closing ................................................................................. 70
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ......................................................... 88
Transporting children safely .................................................................... 95
Driving .......................................................................................................... 99
Displays ..................................................................................................... 116
Lights ......................................................................................................... 134
Safety ........................................................................................................ 139
Driving stability control systems ........................................................... 153
Driving comfort ........................................................................................ 157
Climate control ......................................................................................... 170
Interior equipment ................................................................................... 176
Storage compartments .......................................................................... 181
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Remote control
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls
with integrated key.
Each remote control contains a replaceable bat‐
tery. Replacing the battery, refer to page 72.
You may set the button functions, depending on
the vehicle equipment and country version. Set‐
tings, refer to page 83.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every re‐
mote control. Driver profile, refer to page 81.
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the remote
control, refer to page 230.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
remote control with you so that the vehicle can
be opened from the outside.
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can cause the
vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
Seite 70
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
3 Unlocking the tailgate
4 ▷ With alarm system: panic mode
▷ Without alarm system:
Adjustable function: headlight courtesy
delay feature or stationary climate control.
Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 83,
the following access points are unlocked:
▷ Driver's door.
Press the remote control button again to un‐
lock the front passenger door.
▷ All doors.
In addition, the following functions are executed:
▷ Unlocking is confirmed by the turn signals
and the horn. This function must be activated
in the settings, refer to page 83.
▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, refer
to page 81, are applied.
▷ The interior lights, refer to page 138, are
switched on, unless they were manually
switched off.
▷ Depending on the settings, the welcome light
and headlight courtesy delay feature, refer to
page 135, are switched on.
▷ Exterior mirrors folded through convenient
closing are folded open.
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐
tion is switched off.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 85, is
switched off.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
Convenient opening
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
The windows are opened, as long as the button
on the remote control is pressed.
Locking
1. Close the driver's door.
2.
Press button on the remote control.
The following functions are executed:
▷ The doors are locked.
▷ Locking is confirmed by the turn signals and
the horn. This function must be activated in
the settings, refer to page 83.
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐
tion is switched on. It prevents the doors from
being unlocked using the door openers.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 85, is
switched on.
If the drive-ready state is still switched on when
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be
switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.
Switching on interior lights
Press button on the remote control with
the vehicle locked.
This function is not available, if the interior lights
were switched off manually.
After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing
the button again.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, it is possible to specify whether the
doors are also unlocked when unlocking with the
remote control. Adjusting the settings, refer to
page 83.
Seite 71
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the tailgate is clear
during opening and closing.
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it opens.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the rear
window and heat conductors while driving.
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
not hit the rear window.
Opening
Press button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
With alarm system: panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote control
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Without alarm system: switching the
headlight courtesy delay feature on
The headlight courtesy delay feature must be set
for the remote control button. Settings, refer to
page 83.
Press button on the remote control.
The duration can be set in the Control Display.
Replacing the battery
1. Remove the integrated key from the remote
control, refer to page 74.
2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐
tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the
cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2.
3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow us‐
ing a pointed object and lift it out.
4. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐
tive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
6. Push the integrated key into the remote con‐
trol until it engages.
Seite 72
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or take
them to a collection point.
Additional remote controls
Additional remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 72.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control together
with electronic devices.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐
ing process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 73.
Switching the drive-ready state on via
emergency detection of the remote
control
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the remote control has not been de‐
tected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1.
Hold the remote control with its back against
the marked area on the steering column. Pay
attention to the display in the instrument
cluster.
2. If the remote control is detected:
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
onds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and re‐
peat the procedure.
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without remote control using the integrated key.
Seite 73
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Removing
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Unlocking via the door lock
The driver's door can be unlocked at the door
lock using the integrated key.
Locking from the outside
1.
Close the driver's door from the outside.
2. Enter the vehicle via the front passenger side
and close front passenger door.
3.
Press button for central locking sys‐
tem.
Vehicle is locked.
4. Unlock the front passenger door via the lever
in the door frame, refer to page 78.
5. Exit the vehicle on the front passenger side.
Make sure that the remote control is not in
the vehicle.
6. Close the front passenger door.
Alarm system
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the
door lock.
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with
the remote control or establish the radio-ready
state, if needed, through emergency detection of
the remote control, refer to page 73.
BMW display key
General information
The BMW display key is supplied instead of a
standard remote control, along with an additional
mechanical key. If the display key is used, the
mechanical key should be carried with you, for
instance in the wallet.
The display key supports all functions of the
standard remote control.
In addition, the following functions are also avail‐
able:
▷ Display status of doors and windows.
▷ Operate stationary climate control.
▷ Display charge state of the high-voltage bat‐
tery.
▷ Display fill level of the fuel tank.
▷ Display range with available fuel and the cur‐
rent charge state.
▷ Display remaining charging time during
charging.
▷ Display service information.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
Seite 74
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
display key with you so that the vehicle can be
opened from the outside.
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can cause the
vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Shifting to neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the display key with you when exit‐
ing and lock the vehicle.
Overview
1 Unlocking the tailgate
2 Unlocking
3 Panic mode
4 Locking
5 Display
6 Back
7 Switch the display on/off
8 Micro-USB charging socket
Reception range
The number of available display key functions
depends on the distance from the vehicle.
▷ When you are in close proximity to the vehi‐
cle, all functions of the display key are availa‐
ble.
▷ When you are in the expanded reception
range, you can access status information and
use the stationary climate control.
▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehicle,
you can display the last transmitted status in‐
formation from the vehicle.
The symbol is shown on the display if one of
the buttons is pressed outside of the reception
range.
Display
General information
The display is divided into the upper status line,
the information area, and the lower status line.
Upper status line
The upper status line displays the following infor‐
mation:
▷ Vehicle secured.
Vehicle not secured.
▷ Set time in the vehicle.
▷ Charge state of the battery in the remote
control.
Seite 75
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Information area
The information area can be used to access in‐
formation and perform additional functions.
If the information area contains more than one
page, then page indicators are shown beneath
the information.
The indicator for the current page has
been filled in.
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to change
between the pages.
Hotspots are shown on the display when a page
contains more detailed information.
Touch the desired hotspot to view the corre‐
sponding information.
To return to the original page: tap on the
symbol beneath the display.
Touch it again to display the charge state of the
high-voltage battery.
Lower status line
The lower status line indicates whether or not
the display key is within reception range, refer to
page 75. If it is outside of range, then it indicates
when the last data transfer from the vehicle took
place.
Switching on/off
The display will go out automatically after a brief
period to conserve battery power.
To hide the display manually:
Press the button on the left side of the display
key. Overview, refer to page 75.
To show the display:
1.
Press the button on the left side of the dis‐
play key.
2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to
top to unlock the screen lock.
To switch off the display to increase the usable
battery life:
1.
Press and hold the button on the left side of
the display key for longer than 4 seconds.
2. Confirm the confirmation prompt.
To switch the display on:
Press the button on the left side of the display
key.
Operating concept
The following information shows how to access
the information and functions using the main
menus.
Main menu Information/functions
Vehicle /
Door status.
Vehicle
Window status.
Climate con‐
trol
Operate stationary climate con‐
trol.
Charge state
and range
Charge state of the high-voltage
battery.
During charging: remaining
charging duration.
Fuel level.
Range with available fuel and
the current charge state of the
high-voltage battery.
Service infor‐
mation
Maintenance indicators of Con‐
dition Based Service CBS, refer
to page 230.
Display key battery
General information
Follow the following information:
▷ If the charge state of the display key battery
declines, the display is switched off automati‐
cally. The battery must be recharged so that
the display can be switched back on. The op‐
erability of the standard buttons is retained
until the battery is completely discharged.
Seite 76
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours
before using the display key for the first time
or if the display key has not been used for an
extended period.
▷ The display key can be used while it is being
charged. If the battery is fully discharged, it
may take some time before the display key
can be used again.
▷ Due to the large number of USB chargers
available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐
teed that every charger will function properly.
The charging duration depends on the
charger used.
▷ During charging, the charger and the display
key may become warm. At higher tempera‐
tures, the display key may cause a reduction
in the charging current, and in isolated cases
the charging process may be interrupted
temporarily.
Charging
Connect the display key via the micro-USB
charging socket to a USB port.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
BMW display key detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the display key is discharged.
Charge the battery, refer to page 76.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal ob‐
jects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐
ing process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
Do not transport the display key together with
metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the mechanical key. Proceed according to the
description for the integrated key, refer to
page 73, of the standard remote control.
Switching on drive-ready state via
emergency detection of the BMW display
key
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the display key has not been detected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1.
Hold the display key with its back against the
marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐
tention to the display in the instrument clus‐
ter.
2. If the display key is detected:
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
onds.
If the display key is not detected, slightly change
the position of the display key and repeat the
procedure.
Resetting the BMW display key
If the charged display key cannot be switched on
anymore or if the display does not respond to
entries anymore, the display key can be reset.
Press and hold the button on the left-hand side
of the display key for at least 20 seconds.
Seite 77
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Buttons for the central locking
system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐
tem and interior lights come on.
Safety information
NOTE
The folding doors swivel to the side and up‐
ward. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
doors is clear during opening and closing.
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Press the button with the doors closed.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
Unlocking
Press button.
Opening
Press button.
The door is unlocked and slightly open.
Push the door outward.
Malfunction
When there is a power failure or to unlock the
door from the rear: first push down on the lever
in the door frame in the front area, arrow. The
lever is raised.
Pull the release on the bottom of the lever up‐
wards, arrow 1, then push the lever forwards, ar‐
row 2.
LED in the driver's door
The signals of the LED have the
following meanings:
▷ 1x flashing: door is locked.
The LED then still lights up for
a certain time, if the vehicle
was locked from the outside.
Seite 78
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
The LED then lights up per‐
manently, if the vehicle was
locked from the inside or auto‐
matically while driving off.
▷ 2x flashing: door is unlocked.
▷ More than 2x flashing: door error. In this case
contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the car's
interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
Functional requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle near the
doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Unlocking
Before pressing the door opener button, draw
your hand across the sensor surface.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Locking
From above, touch the surface on the side wall
with your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Convenient closing
Safety information
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.
Seite 79
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Closing
From above, touch the surface on the sidewall
with your finger and hold it there, arrow.
This corresponds with pressing and holding the
button on the remote control.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 72.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control together
with electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking
request recognition function on the door han‐
dles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the
vehicle using the buttons of the remote control
or using the integrated key, refer to page 73.
Hood
The hood may only be opened by an authorized
BMW i dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop that works with
personnel trained according to BMW i specifica‐
tions.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, it is possible to specify whether the
doors are also unlocked when unlocking with the
remote control. Adjusting the settings, refer to
page 83.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the tailgate is clear
during opening and closing.
NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it opens.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the rear
window and heat conductors while driving.
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
not hit the rear window.
Seite 80
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Opening and closing
Opening from the outside
Press button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may also be
unlocked. Unlocking with the remote control, re‐
fer to page 71.
The tailgate is opened slightly and can be swung
upward.
Opening from the inside
With the vehicle stationary, press the
button in the door armrest.
Closing
Grasp the outside of the tailgate and pull it down.
Trunk emergency unlocking
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The tailgate is unlocked.
Driver profile
Concept
In the driver profiles, individual settings for sev‐
eral drivers can be stored and called up again
when required.
General information
There are three driver profiles with which per‐
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐
mote control has one of these driver profiles as‐
signed.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote control,
the assigned personal driver profile will be acti‐
vated. All settings stored in the driver profile are
automatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings dur‐
ing unlocking. These settings are also restored, if
the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a
person with a different remote control.
Changes to the settings are automatically stored
in the driver profile currently activated.
If another driver profile is selected via iDrive, the
settings stored in it will be applied automatically.
The new driver profile is assigned to the remote
control currently used.
There is an additional guest profile available that
is not assigned to any remote control. It can be
used to apply settings in the vehicle without
changing the personal driver profiles.
Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the driver
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐
tected remote control must be clearly allocated
to the driver.
This is the case when:
▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own re‐
mote control.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle.
▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the
driver's door.
Settings
The settings for the following systems and func‐
tions are stored in the active profile. The scope
of storable settings depends on country and
equipment.
Seite 81
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio.
▷ Instrument cluster.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
▷ Volumes, tone.
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control.
▷ Top View.
▷ Head-up Display.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
▷ Intelligent Safety.
Profile management
Selecting a driver profile
Regardless of the remote control in use, a differ‐
ent driver profile may be activated. This allows
you to call up personal vehicle settings, even if
you did not unlock the vehicle with your own re‐
mote control.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK"
▷ All settings stored in the called-up driver pro‐
file are automatically applied.
▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to the
remote control being used at the time.
▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a dif‐
ferent remote control, this driver profile will
apply to both remote controls.
Using a guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings that are
stored in none of the three personal driver pro‐
files.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Drive off (guest)"
4. "OK"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
assigned to the current remote control.
Renaming a driver profile
A personal name can be assigned to the active
driver profile to avoid confusion between the
driver profiles.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
can be renamed.
4. "Change driver profile name"
5. Enter profile name.
6. Select the symbol.
Resetting a driver profile
The settings of the driver profile currently in use
are reset to their factory settings.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
can be reset.
4. "Reset driver profile"
5. "OK"
Seite 82
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Exporting driver profiles
Most settings of the active driver profile can be
exported.
Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving
personal settings, for instance before delivering
the vehicle to a workshop. The stored driver pro‐
files can be taken into another vehicle.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
can be exported.
4. "Export driver profile"
5. Select a storage device for exporting the
driver profile.
▷ "USB device"
Select USB storage device, as needed,
refer to page 56.
▷ Online.
Alternatively, the settings and contacts can be
exported via an app to a compatible smartphone.
Importing driver profiles
Alternatively, the settings and contacts can be
imported via an app from a compatible smart‐
phone.
The existing settings of the active driver profile
are overwritten with the settings of the imported
driver profile.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select the driver profile to be overwritten.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
can be overwritten.
4. "Import driver profile"
5. Select a storage device for importing the
driver profile.
▷ USB storage device: "USB device"
Select USB storage device as needed.
▷ Online.
6. Select the driver profile to be imported.
Displaying driver profiles during start
The driver profiles can be displayed during each
start to select the desired profile.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
System limits
A clear assignment between the remote control
and driver may not be possible in the following
cases, for example.
▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or
her own remote control, but another person
is driving.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
Access and has multiple remote controls with
him or her.
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
▷ Multiple remote controls are located outside
of the vehicle.
Settings
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, various settings for opening and clos‐
ing are possible.
These settings are stored for the driver profile,
refer to page 81, currently used.
Seite 83
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Unlocking
Doors
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door is unlocked. Press‐
ing again unlocks the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, this setting may not be offered.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4.
The text next to the symbol indicates the cur‐
rent setting.
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Tailgate"
The tailgate is unlocked.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
The tailgate and the doors are unlocked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐
tion signals.
▷ "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, lock‐
ing by one.
▷ With alarm system:
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the
horn.
Automatic locking
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select desired setting:
▷ "Lock automatically"
The vehicle locks automatically after a
short period of time if no door is opened
after unlocking.
▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after you
drive off.
Automatic unlocking
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"
After the engine is switched off by pressing
the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is
automatically unlocked.
Without alarm system: headlight
courtesy delay feature/stationary
climate control
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
Seite 84
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Pathway lighting"
Or:
"Comfort climate control"
5. Select the desired function:
▷ "Pathway lighting"
Headlight courtesy delay feature
▷ "Comfort climate control"
Stationary climate control
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood or
the tailgate.
▷ Movements in the car's interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance during
attempts at stealing a wheel.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
▷ Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
nosis.
The alarm system signals these changes visually
and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm:
Depending on local regulations, the acoustic
alarm may be suppressed.
▷ Visual alarm:
By flashing the exterior lighting.
Switching on/off
When you lock and unlock the vehicle with the
remote control or Comfort Access, the alarm
system will also switch on or off at the same
time.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 86.
Opening the tailgate with the alarm
system switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm
system is switched on.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐
tored again provided the doors are locked. The
hazard warning system flashes once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote control
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Indicator light on the interior mirror
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds,
then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are
Seite 85
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
not correctly closed. Correctly closed access
points are secured.
When the still open access points are closed,
interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
will be switched on.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐
til the radio-ready state is switched on, but no
longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such as
attempts to steal a wheel.
Interior motion sensor
The windows must be closed for the system to
function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized
action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ At the gas station: if the vehicle is locked after
refueling starts.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off in such situations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is
locked.
The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control or
establish radio-ready state, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, refer
to page 73.
▷ With Comfort Access:
If you are carrying the remote control on your
person, touch the sensor surface, refer to
page 79, before the door opener button.
Power windows
Safety information
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts and
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Make sure that
the area of movement of the windows is clear
during opening and closing.
Seite 86
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Overview
Power windows
Opening
▷
Press the switch to the resistance point.
The window opens while the switch is being
held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening via the remote control, refer
to page 71.
Closing
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch is being
held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically if the door
is closed. Pulling again stops the motion.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 79.
Jam protection system
General information
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as a
window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Safety information
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as antennas
can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Do not install accessories in the area of
movement of the windows.
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might
prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point
and hold it there.
The window closes with limited jam protec‐
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted.
2.
Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Seite 87
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs of
the occupants can make a vital contribution to
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Additionally, fol‐
low the following chapters for safe driving:
▷ Seats, refer to page 88.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 90.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 92.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 139.
Seats
Safety information
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead to un‐
expected movements of the seat. Vehicle con‐
trol could be lost. There is a risk of an accident.
Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when
the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the
efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts
can no longer be ensured. There is a risk of
sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Ad‐
just the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the
backrest so that it is in the most upright posi‐
tion as possible and do not adjust again while
driving.
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Rear seating positions
The vehicle is designed as a 2+2-seater. The
utility of the rear seats is limited. In order to keep
the risk of an injury during an accident as small
as possible, the top edge of the backrest should
be at least just above eye height.
Seite 88
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Electrically adjustable seats
Overview
1 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
2 Backrest tilt
Forward/backward
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch up or down.
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Move switch forward or backward.
Entering the vehicle in the rear
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Seite 89
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest while
driving may occur due to an unlocked backrest.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
injury. Fold back and lock the backrests before
driving.
Folding down the backrest
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold backrest forward.
Front seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each temperature
level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes
after a stop, seat heating is activated automati‐
cally with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO is activated, refer to page 194,
the heater output is reduced.
Switching off
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts and safety belt
buckles
The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts to en‐
sure occupant safety. However, they can only of‐
fer protection when adjusted correctly.
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐
though airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of every build
if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of the
safety belt to serve its protective function.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do
not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐
gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐
lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐
ported and secured in designated child
restraint systems.
Seite 90
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts
are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐
stance in the event of an accident or during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the
following situations:
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts,
safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐
tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have
the safety belts checked after an accident at
the dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The safety belt may not press on
your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward
around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt
1. Slowly guide the safety belt out of the holder
when fastening it.
2. Insert the safety belt into the belt buckle, ar‐
row 1.
3. Insert the buckle tongue into the safety belt
buckle, arrow 2. The safety belt buckle must
engage audibly.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1.
Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and
passenger's seat
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light lights up and a signal
sounds. Make sure that the safety belts
are positioned correctly. The safety belt
reminder can also be activated if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat.
Seite 91
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Front head restraints
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to removed or
not correctly adjusted head restraints can
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height
The height of the head restraints cannot be ad‐
justed.
Distance
The spacing is adjusted to the back of the head
using the incline of the seat backrest.
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Safety information
WARNING
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. The distance to the traffic behind
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance
while changing lanes. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind
by looking over your shoulder.
Overview
1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
Seite 92
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
Press button.
The mirror movement follows the button
movement.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.
Folding in and out
NOTE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a
risk of damage to property. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
Press button.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever drive-ready state is switched on.
Automatic dimming feature
Both exterior mirrors are automatically dimmed.
Photocells in the interior mirror are used to con‐
trol this.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other low-ly‐
ing obstacles when parking, for instance.
Activating
1.
Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's side
mirror position.
Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Flip lever
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior mir‐
ror, flip the lever forward.
Seite 93
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Interior mirror, automatic dimming
feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving can
lead to unexpected steering wheel movements.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
an accident. Adjust the steering wheel while
the vehicle is stationary only.
Settings
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating position.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Seite 94
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
The right place for children
Safety information
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can cause the
vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Always transport children in the rear
seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Transport children younger than 13 years of age
or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat
in suitable child restraint systems designed for
the age, weight and size of the child. Children
13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt
as soon as a suitable child restraint system can
no longer be used due to their age, weight, and
size.
Safety information
WARNING
The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on
children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐
ble additional child restraint systems. The effi‐
cacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can
be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety
belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft,
150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.
Children on the front passenger seat
General information
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
straint system in the front passenger seat, make
sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the
front passenger side are deactivated. Automatic
deactivation of front-seat passenger airbags, re‐
fer to page 141.
Seite 95
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Safety information
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
ment or improper installation of the child seat.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
Installing child restraint systems
Safety information
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
ment or improper installation of the child seat.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
WARNING
The protective effect of damaged child restraint
systems or of child restraint systems exposed
to an accident and their fastening systems can
be limited or lost. A child can e.g.,not suffi‐
ciently restrained, for instance in the event of
an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have
damaged child restraint systems or of child re‐
straint systems exposed to an accident and
their fastening systems checked and possibly
replaced by the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
After installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐
tomatically, refer to page 141.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possible
and bring it as far up as possible to obtain the
best possible position for the belt and to offer
optimal protection in the event of an accident.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the front passenger seat carefully forward
Seite 96
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
until the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten
child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1.
Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system. The
safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1.
Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
mation of the child restraint system manufacturer
when installing and using LATCH child restraint
fixing systems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is
restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are
not correctly engaged, the protective effect of
the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be
limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐
straint fixing system fits securely against the
backrest.
Position
Symbol Meaning
The corresponding symbol
shows the mounts for the lower
LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower an‐
chors are marked with a pair, 2,
of LATCH symbols.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
fixing systems
1.
Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐
er's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Seite 97
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Child restraint systems with
tether strap
Safety information
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐
fect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not
guided across sharp edges and without twist‐
ing to the upper retaining strap.
WARNING
If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective
effect of the child restraint system is limited or
there is none. In particular situations, for in‐
stance braking maneuvers or in case of an acci‐
dent, the rear backrest can fold forward. There
is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
that the rear backrests are locked.
NOTE
The anchors for the upper retaining straps of
child restraint systems are only provided for
these retaining straps. When other objects are
mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There
is a risk of damage to property. Only mount
child restraint systems to the upper retaining
straps.
Anchors
The respective symbol shows the anchor
for the upper retaining strap. Seats with
an upper top tether are marked with this
symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest
or the rear window shelf.
Routing the retaining strap
1 Direction of travel
2 Upper retaining strap
3 Head restraint
4 Rear window shelf
5 Anchor
6 Hook for upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the anchor
1.
Lift the cover over the anchor.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap over or along
both sides of the head restraint to the anchor.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
anchor.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.
Seite 98
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Start/Stop button, drive-ready
state
Concept
The following ready states can be
attained by pressing the Start/
Stop button:
▷ Radio-ready state on/off.
▷ Standby state on/off.
▷ Activating/deactivating drive-ready state.
To activate drive-ready state, press the brake
pedal.
The drive-ready state cannot be activated as
long as the charging cable is connected, refer to
page 200.
Switching radio-ready state on/off
The radio-ready state is activated by pressing
the Start/Stop button in the following situations:
▷ When the engine is running.
▷ When drive-ready state is activated.
Some electronic systems/power consumers re‐
main ready for operation.
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
cally:
▷ If the driver's or front passenger door is
opened when exiting the vehicle, with drive-
ready state switched off manually.
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central
locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged com‐
pletely, so that drive-ready state is main‐
tained.
The radio-ready state remains active if, for in‐
stance standby state is automatically switched
off for the following reasons:
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
▷ When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
Standby state on
The switched on standby state corresponds to
the switched on ignition for conventional vehi‐
cles.
Press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on
the brake pedal at the same time.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster light up for a varied length of time.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off standby state and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Information on the standby state
If the engine is switched off and standby state is
switched on: the system automatically switches
to radio-ready state when the door is opened if
the lights are switched off or, if the vehicle is
equipped accordingly, the daytime running lights
are switched on.
Seite 99
Driving
CONTROLS
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Standby state off
Press the Start/Stop button again without step‐
ping on the brake.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off standby state and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Standby state is switched off automatically in the
following situations while the vehicle is stationary
and the engine is off:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the low
beams are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged com‐
pletely, so that drive-ready state is main‐
tained. This function is only available when
the low beams are switched off.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
low beams are switched off.
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
with driver's door open and low beams off.
▷ When the doors are opened if there is no
other person sitting in the front seats.
The low beams switch to parking lights after ap‐
prox. 15 minutes of no use.
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged when standby state is switched off. In or‐
der for the vehicle to be able to roll, for instance
into a vehicle wash, heed the information regard‐
ing washing in automatic vehicle washes, refer to
page 239.
Drive-ready state
When drive-ready state is activated, the vehicle is
operational. Activated drive-ready state is the
equivalent of a running engine in conventional
vehicles. Deactivated drive-ready state is equiva‐
lent to switching the ignition off.
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged when drive-ready state is switched off. In
order for the vehicle to be able to roll, for in‐
stance into a vehicle wash, heed the information
regarding washing in automatic vehicle washes,
refer to page 239.
Drive-ready state in detail
Concept
The following are the different drive-ready state
variants:
▷ Electric drive-ready state, refer to page 101.
The vehicle is powered by the electric motor.
▷ Starting the combustion engine, refer to
page 101.
The vehicle is powered by the combustion
engine.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
WARNING
When driving in electric mode, pedestrians and
other traffic might pay less attention to the ve‐
hicle due to the lack of engine noise. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
Seite 100
CONTROLS
Driving
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Display on the Start/Stop button
General information
Drive-ready state is also displayed
through light indicators on the
Start/Stop button.
Lighting pulses orange
▷ After unlocking and opening the door.
▷ After switching off drive-ready state.
When the brake pedal is depressed, the lighting
becomes more intense.
Lighting lights up steady blue
After drive-ready state is switched on, light turns
blue. The vehicle is ready to drive. The READY
indicator lights up in the instrument cluster. In
addition, a signal sounds.
Lighting off
Drive-ready state, standby state and radio-ready
state are switched off. The vehicle is in the idle
state. The charging cable may be connected.
Activating drive-ready state
1.
Close the driver's door.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Depending on the prerequisite, the electric driv‐
ing is possible or the engine can be started.
Electric drive-ready state
General information
The vehicle is ready for driving without starting
the combustion engine.
Functional requirements
The electric drive-ready state is possible, if the
prerequisites for electric driving, ePOWER, are
fulfilled.
Display
READY indicates drive-ready
state.
Combustion engine start
Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Seite 101
Driving
CONTROLS
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
NOTE
In the case of repeated starting attempts or re‐
peated starting in quick succession, the fuel is
not burned or is inadequately burned. The cata‐
lytic converter can overheat. There is a risk of
damage to property. Avoid repeated starting in
quick succession.
Functional requirements
The combustion engine is started with Activate
drive-ready state, refer to page 101, under the
following conditions:
▷ The temperature of the hybrid system is too
high.
▷ The charge level or temperature of the high-
voltage battery is too low.
Driving away
1.
Activate drive-ready state.
2. Apply the brake and engage the selector
lever in position P D, SPORT or R.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Drive away.
Deactivating drive-ready state
After parking the vehicle, you may hear noises
due to operation of the hybrid system, such as
for cooling of the high-voltage battery.
After stopping the vehicle:
1.
Depress the brake pedal.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The READY indicator goes out and a signal
sounds. In case of longer idle times, follow the in‐
structions in the Care chapter, refer to page 242.
Electric driving: ePOWER
Safety information
WARNING
When driving in electric mode, pedestrians and
other traffic might pay less attention to the ve‐
hicle due to the lack of engine noise. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
General information
In ePOWER, the vehicle is driven exclusively
electrically. ePOWER works automatically.
Depending on the charge state of the high-volt‐
age battery, maximum speed and range achieved
can vary.
For electrical driving, certain conditions, refer to
page 102, must be satisfied.
The displays for the hybrid system are described
in the Displays chapter.
Functional requirements
▷ State of charge and temperature of the high-
voltage battery is sufficient.
▷ Selector lever position D or R engaged.
▷ The accelerator pedal is only slightly de‐
pressed.
▷ The possible maximum speed for electric
driving is not exceeded.
▷ The driver's door is closed.
Auto eDRIVE
General information
Auto eDRIVE is activated by default when the ve‐
hicle is started via the Start/Stop button.
In Auto eDRIVE, the vehicle is driven in hybrid
mode corresponding to the various driving situa‐
Seite 102
CONTROLS
Driving
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
tions, i.e. the drive combines combustion engine
and electric motor. The respectively most effec‐
tive drive type is preferred.
Maintaining charge state
Should it be necessary, for instance to conserve
the electrical range for a later point in time on the
trip, the current charge state of the high-voltage
battery can be maintained with this function.
The function is possible under the following con‐
ditions:
▷ The fuel fill level is sufficient.
▷ Engaged selector lever position D.
▷ Driving mode Auto eDrive.
Switching on/off
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "AUTO eDRIVE"
4. "Hold state of charge"
MAX eDRIVE
General information
The vehicle is driven exclusively
electrically.
Information
At low external temperatures, the combustion
engine starts already at low speeds prior to the
hybrid system reaching its operating tempera‐
ture.
If necessary, the speed limit may be deliberately
exceeded with the aid of kickdown, refer to
page 112. The combustion engine is automati‐
cally activated and switched into AUTO eDRIVE
mode.
Overview
Activating MAX eDRIVE
Press button.
▷ LED lights up: max eDRIVE is activated.
▷ LED goes out: max eDRIVE is deactivated.
Display on the Control Display
The system can be set so that changes to the
eDRIVE setting are automatically shown on the
Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. If necessary, "Pop-ups"
4. "eDRIVE"
Acoustic pedestrian protection
Concept
Depending on the country-specific version, the
system generates a continuous driving noise
during electric driving up to approx.
20 mph/30 km/h.
A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the
surroundings.
As a result, other traffic participants, for instance
pedestrians or cyclists, can better perceive the
vehicle.
Seite 103
Driving
CONTROLS
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Driving with the combustion
engine: POWER
Depending on the operating state, the combus‐
tion engine is automatically switched on:
▷ Selector lever position Sport is set.
▷ Speed for electric driving is exceeded.
▷ The high-voltage battery has an insufficient
charge.
▷ High-voltage battery is completely charged,
for instance when driving downhill.
▷ For improved traction, for instance on slip‐
pery roads.
▷ During intense accelerations or on uphill
grades.
▷ System-related requirement for hybrid com‐
ponents.
▷ Adapting to the course of the road when des‐
tination guidance is activated.
When reducing speed, the combustion engine is
switched off when the conditions for electric driv‐
ing, refer to page 102, are met.
Assistance from the electric
motor
Concept
Depending on the operating state, the electric
motor provides assistance with additional propul‐
sive power.
ASSIST
During normal vehicle operation, the electric mo‐
tor assists the combustion engine, depending on
the situation.
eBOOST
Accelerating quickly, such as when passing, re‐
quires the maximum available power from the
electric motor. To do this, apply extra force to the
accelerator pedal.
Energy recovery: CHARGE
Concept
The high-voltage battery is recharged in part
through energy recovery. The electric motor acts
as a generator when decelerating and converts
the kinetic energy into electrical energy.
General information
Energy cannot be recovered in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ Selector lever position N is set.
▷ While drive stability control systems control
the vehicle, even though it is not indicated by
an indicator light.
▷ The high-voltage battery is fully charged.
▷ When temperature of the high-voltage bat‐
tery is very low or very high.
With cold external temperatures, it is possible
that the energy recovery is temporarily un‐
available after startup.
Functional requirements
Energy can be recovered if conditions such as
the following are met:
▷ The vehicle is moving.
▷ Speed higher than approx. 12 mph/20 km/h.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position D, R
or S.
▷ The high-voltage battery is not fully charged.
▷ Accelerator pedal is not operated.
Seite 104
CONTROLS
Driving
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Parking brake
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can cause the
vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Overview
Parking brake
Setting
With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator light lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
While driving
To use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the switch is being pulled.
The indicator light lights up red, a signal
sounds and the brake lights light up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.
Releasing
Releasing manually
1.
Switch on drive-ready state.
2.
Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Seite 105
Driving
CONTROLS
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Automatic release
For automatic release, step on the accelerator
pedal.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is automatically released
when you step on the accelerator pedal under
the following conditions:
▷ Drive-ready state switched on.
▷ Drive mode engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Malfunction
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling
using a wheel chock, for instance when leaving it.
After a power failure
Putting the parking brake into operation
1.
Switch on standby state.
2.
Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be
put into operation. Any sounds associated with
this are normal.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter goes out as soon as the parking brake
is ready for operation.
Turn signal, high beams,
headlight flasher
Turn signal
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in
the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on
the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Using turn signals
Press the lever past the resistance point.
The lever returns into its starting position after
actuation. To switch off manually, slightly tap the
lever to the resistance point.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The turn signal flashes three times.
The function can be activated or deactivated.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it
there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indi‐
cates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
Seite 106
CONTROLS
Driving
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them
to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Switching on
Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance
point.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi‐
tion when released.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
down twice.
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed: press
down once.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi‐
tion when released.
Seite 107
Driving
CONTROLS
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of the
rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain
sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is
preset.
Safety information
NOTE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can
accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started.
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: the
LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐
tion is deactivated.
During trip interruption with the rain sensor
switched on: if the trip is resumed within approx.
15 minutes, the rain sensor is automatically acti‐
vated again.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the
rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency or
sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at
low temperatures and obstruct the view. There
is a risk of an accident. Only use the washer
systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use
antifreeze, if needed.
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
wash pump cannot work as intended. There is
a risk of damage to property. Do not use the
washer system when the washer fluid reservoir
is empty.
Seite 108
CONTROLS
Driving
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automatically
heated while standby state is switched on.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-out position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
General information
Important, for instance when changing the wiper
blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐
tions.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Folding away the wipers
1. Switch standby state on and off again.
2. With frosty conditions, make sure that the
blades are not frozen to the windshield.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of
resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds,
until the wipers remain in a nearly vertical po‐
sition.
4. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
system must be reactivated.
1.
Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on standby state.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their
resting position and are ready again for oper‐
ation.
Seite 109
Driving
CONTROLS
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be
used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful
substances and are flammable. There is a risk
of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instruc‐
tions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away
from ignition sources. Do not refill operating
materials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid
dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage
instructions on the washer fluid container.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
or the equivalent is recommended.
NOTE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid
for the water-repelling effect on the windows
can lead to damage to the washing system.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
add silicon-containing additives to the washer
fluid.
NOTE
Mixing different windshield washer concen‐
trates or antifreeze can damage the washing
system. There is a risk of damage to property.
Do not mix different windshield washer concen‐
trates or antifreeze. Follow the information and
mixing ratios provided on the containers.
Overview
The reservoir is located under the cover between
hood and wiper linkage.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer concen‐
trate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to in‐
correct readings at temperatures below
+5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Steptronic Sport transmission
Concept
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐
tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐
sibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Seite 110
CONTROLS
Driving
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle opera‐
tion. All gears for forward travel are activated au‐
tomatically.
Reverse R
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without en‐
gine power in selector lever position N, for in‐
stance in vehicle washes, refer to page 239.
When the drive-ready state is switched off, se‐
lector lever position P is engaged automatically.
Parking position P
Selector lever position, for instance for parking
the vehicle.
The transmission blocks the drive wheels in se‐
lector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally in situations such as the following:
▷ After the drive-ready state is deactivated in
the radio-ready state, refer to page 99, or
standby state off, refer to page 100, when se‐
lector lever position D, M/S or R is engaged.
▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the
driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal
is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary
and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐
gaged.
▷ After the standby state has been switched off
when selector lever position N is engaged.
On uphill and downhill grades, secure the vehicle
with the parking brake before shifting into selec‐
tor lever position P.
Engaging selector lever positions
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Functional requirements
Only when the engine is running, or when the
drive-ready state is switched on and the brake
pedal is depressed, is it possible to change from
selector lever position P to another selector lever
position.
Engaging selector lever position D, N, R
A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty
operation:
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐
tion R.
Seite 111
Driving
CONTROLS
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐
sition P into another selector lever position.
1. Press and hold the button to release the se‐
lector lever lock.
2. With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly
push the selector lever in the desired direc‐
tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The
selector lever automatically returns to the
center position when released.
Engaging selector lever position P
Press button P.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power for a short distance, for instance in
a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on
the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐
lector lever position N.
5. Switch off drive-ready state.
In this way, standby state remains switched
on, and a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
The vehicle may roll.
NOTE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged when standby state is switched off.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.
Irrespective of standby state, the selector lever
position P is automatically engaged after approx.
15 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to
change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 114.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐
ance point at the full throttle position.
Seite 112
CONTROLS
Driving
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Sport program M/S
Concept
By activating the Sport program, the vehicle is
tuned for sporty driving.
Activating the sport program
Press the selector lever to the left out of selector
lever position D.
The SPORT indication is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The sport program of the vehicle
is activated.
Ending the Sport program
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Automatic termination
Pressing the Driving Dynamics Control or the
eDRIVE button terminates the Sport program of
the vehicle.
The selector lever automatically tips back into
the original position.
Manual mode M/S
Concept
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.
Activating manual mode
1. Press the selector lever to the left out of se‐
lector lever position D, arrow 1.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode becomes active and the selector
lever position is changed. The engaged selector
lever position is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter, for instance M1, and in the Head-up Display,
for instance 1, where applicable.
Shifting
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
The transmission continues shifting automati‐
cally in certain situations, for instance when
speed limits are reached.
Ending the manual mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
Seite 113
Driving
CONTROLS
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
General information
Shifting
The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and
road speeds.
Switching into manual mode
After a shift paddle is actuated, the system
switches to manual mode.
Switching into automatic mode
The transmission switches back to automatic
mode in the following situations:
▷ With selector position D: if there has been no
acceleration or shifting of the shift paddles
within a certain amount of time.
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
Shifting
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
The shift paddles can be used only when Driving
with the combustion engine, refer to page 104.
If Auto eDrive is activated, the combustion en‐
gine starts first.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example P.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling
away.
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Press the Start/Stop button. Standby state is
switched on.
2. Press and hold down brake pedal.
3. Press the button on the selector lever, ar‐
row 1, and press the selector lever into selec‐
tor lever position N, arrow N.
Selector lever position N is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
A Check Control message is displayed.
4. Release the brake.
5. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
For additional information, see the chapter on
tow-starting and towing.
Launch Control
Concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐
rounding conditions.
Seite 114
CONTROLS
Driving
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents a
very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 186, period.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Functional requirements
Launch Control is available when the combustion
engine is at operating temperature. The engine
is at operating temperature after an uninter‐
rupted trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.
Start with launch control
With the combustion engine running:
1. Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
position, kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes
before Launch Control can be used again.
After using Launch Control
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control again.
Seite 115
Driving
CONTROLS
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Instrument cluster
Concept
The instrument cluster is a variable display.
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
may differ from the way they are shown in this
Owner's Manual.
If the program is changed or the Sport program
activated via the Driving Dynamics Control, the
display rendition adapts to the respective pro‐
gram.
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
2 External temperature 124
3 Time 125
4 Messages, for instance Check Control
Navigation display.
5 Driving Dynamics Control 155
Selection list, such as for the radio 128
6 Performance display 187
Seite 116
CONTROLS
Displays
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Variable driving mode displays 117
7 Trip odometer 124
8 Selector lever position display 110
9 READY indicator 101
10 Overall range 125
11 Battery charge indicator 118
12 Fuel gauge 124
13 Onboard Computer 128
Variable driving mode displays
ECO PRO displays
In ECO PRO, the instrument cluster switches to
the ECO PRO displays. These displays support a
driving style that saves on fuel consumption with
more prominent representation of the efficiency
display and various ECO PRO tips.
Sport program displays
In the Sport program, the instrument cluster
switches the instrument cluster to the Sport dis‐
plays. These displays support a sporty driving
style with more prominent representation of the
tachometer and a clearer representation of the
eBOOST performance in the form of a blue illu‐
minated ring.
Charging screen
1 Charging status 204
2 End of charging time 204
Departure time with timer 205
3 Maximum electrical range 204
4 Stationary climate control 205
5 Range for electric driving 204
6 Charge state 118
Seite 117
Displays
CONTROLS
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Displays of the hybrid system
Displays in the instrument cluster
General information
The following functions of the hybrid system are
displayed:
▷ High-voltage battery charge indicator, refer to
page 118.
▷ Drive-ready state: READY, refer to page 118.
▷ Electric driving: ePOWER, refer to page 118.
▷ Energy recovery: CHARGE, refer to
page 119.
▷ Acceleration boost: eBOOST, refer to
page 119.
▷ Electric driving: MAX eDRIVE, refer to
page 103
▷ Maintaining charge state, refer to page 119.
The display depends on the system's operating
condition.
High-voltage battery charge indicator
WARNING
Even when it is indicated that the high-voltage
battery is discharged, the high-voltage system
is always still under high voltage. There is a risk
of fire or a risk of injury. Do not touch or change
live parts, for instance orange high-voltage ca‐
bles, even when the batteries are discharged.
The fill level bars indicate the available charge
state of the high-voltage battery when standby
state and drive-ready state are switched on.
In addition, the range for electric driving is dis‐
played.
Drive-ready state: READY
READY indicates drive-ready
state. For further information,
please refer to Drive-ready state
in detail, refer to page 100.
Electric driving: ePOWER
The inner narrow blue stripe, arrow 1, marks the
range for electric driving.
If a white mark is located in the range after the
stripe, arrow 2, the combustion engine is
switched on.
In COMFORT and ECO PRO driving mode, the
specified power of the electric motor and the in‐
ternal combustion engine is indicated by a white
mark, arrow 3.
In ECO PRO mode, the range for efficient driving
style is colored blue, arrow 4.
For further information, refer to Electric driving:
ePOWER.
Seite 118
CONTROLS
Displays
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Energy recovery: CHARGE
The energy recovered is indicated in the COM‐
FORT and ECO PRO modes by four bars in the
CHARGE range. The high-voltage battery is
charged. Depending on the available output of
the high-voltage battery, more or less eBOOST
could be recovered. If the high-voltage battery is
completely charged, no energy can be recov‐
ered. The four bars are grayed-out.
For further information, please refer to Energy re‐
covery CHARGE, refer to page 104.
Acceleration boost: eBOOST
Five bars indicate the available output of the
electric motor for the eBOOST, refer to page 64,
acceleration boost. Depending on the available
output of the high-voltage battery, there could be
more or less eBOOST available. If the high-volt‐
age battery is completely discharged, all five bars
are grayed-out.
Maintaining charge state
In the maintaining charge state mode, the ar‐
row indicates the high-voltage battery charge
state that is being conserved for a later point in
the trip.
▷ Gray arrow: maintaining charge state mode
deactivated.
▷ Orange arrow: maintaining charge state mode
activated.
Activating/deactivating the maintaining charge
state mode, refer to page 102.
Indications on the Control Display
Displaying the hybrid system utilization
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"
4. Select the symbol.
Hybrid system utilization
Seite 119
Displays
CONTROLS
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Bars show the average consumption over a spe‐
cific period of time, arrow 1.
One bar indicates one minute.
The average fuel consumption of the combus‐
tion engine is indicated using a line and a value
above the bar display, arrow 2. The indicated
value is identical to the average fuel consumption
in the Onboard Computer and can be reset via
the Onboard Computer.
Displaying the energy flow
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"
4. Select the symbol.
Energy flow of the hybrid system
The following are displayed:
▷ Active components of the hybrid system.
▷ Direction of the energy flows:
Orange: energy flow of the combustion en‐
gine.
Blue: energy flow of the hybrid system.
▷ Vehicle states:
▷ EPOWER.
▷ POWER.
▷ eBOOST.
▷ CHARGE.
▷ Coasting.
▷ Charging.
▷ System requirements of the hybrid system,
for instance drive system not yet warmed up
to operating temperature.
▷ Driving requirement, for instance transmis‐
sion selector lever in the Sport position.
Adapting to the course of the road
Concept
When the navigation system destination guid‐
ance is active, hybrid operation adapts to specific
route sections.
Use of the hybrid system is optional.
Situations which are already underway and situa‐
tions ahead are detected, indicated on the Con‐
trol Display, and the hybrid drive is prepared for
them.
The function may be restricted if the navigation
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐
ample.
Functional requirements
▷ Selector lever position D engaged.
▷ AUTO eDRIVE hybrid mode is activated.
Displaying the adaptation to the course of the
road
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"
4. Select the symbol.
Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions in
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
Seite 120
CONTROLS
Displays
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
bination of indicator or warning lights and SMS
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and an
SMS text message may appear on the Control
Display.
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator/warning lights in the instrument
cluster can light up in a variety of combinations
and colors.
Several lights indicate function checks and light
up only temporarily when drive-ready state or
standby state are activated.
Red lights
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner are not
working.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
Release the parking brake, refer to
page 105.
Brake system
Braking system impaired. Continue to
drive moderately.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Approach control warning
Indicator light illuminates: advance warn‐
ing is issued, for example when there is
the impending danger of a collision or
the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Increase distance.
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another vehicle at a relatively high dif‐
ferential speed.
Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐
neuver.
Person warning
If a collision with a person detected in
this way is imminent, the symbol lights
up and a signal sounds.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Braking force boost may not be working.
Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer
braking distance into account.
Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces. The vehicle
is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify
your driving style to the driving circumstances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
tioned.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
DSC, refer to page 153.
Seite 121
Displays
CONTROLS
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or
DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated
DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.
DSC, refer to page 153, and DTC, refer
to page 154.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light lights up: the Tire
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire infla‐
tion pressure or a flat tire. Follow the in‐
formation in the Check Control message.
The indicator light flashes and then continuously
lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pres‐
sure can be detected.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leaving
the area of the interference, the system auto‐
matically becomes active again.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
set the system again.
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 142.
Steering system
Steering system in some cases not
working.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
ously damage emission control components,
in particular the catalytic converter.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 231.
Acoustic pedestrian protection inactive
Acoustic pedestrian protection deacti‐
vated or possibly not working.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
failed.
Turn signal, refer to page 106.
Parking lights, headlight
Parking lights or headlights are switched
on.
Parking lights/low beams, headlight con‐
trol, refer to page 134.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off au‐
tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐
uation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 136.
Seite 122
CONTROLS
Displays
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the control
elements on the steering wheel.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are switched on.
High beams, refer to page 106.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions oc‐
cur at once, the messages are displayed consec‐
utively.
The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐
onds. After this time, they are displayed again
automatically.
Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check
Control messages are stored and can be dis‐
played again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐
bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check
Control message and the meaning of the indica‐
tor/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will be au‐
tomatically displayed on the Control Display.
Functions
Depending on the Check Control message, the
following functions can be selected.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ "BMW i Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
Seite 123
Displays
CONTROLS
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Messages after trip completion
Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after standby state is switched
off.
Fuel gauge
Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to
vary.
Follow the information on refueling.
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Tachometer
The tachometer is only available in the Sport
program.
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature
If the engine oil becomes too hot, along with the
engine, a Check Control message is displayed.
When the engine oil temperature is too
high, a red indicator light is displayed.
Coolant temperature
If the coolant along with the engine becomes too
hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
A red indicator light is displayed.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 229.
Odometer and trip odometer
Display
▷ Odometer, scope of the Onboard Computer.
▷ Trip odometer, lower right display in the in‐
strument cluster.
Show/reset miles
Press the button.
▷ With standby state switched
off, the time, the external tem‐
perature and the odometer are
displayed.
▷ When standby state is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
External temperature
General information
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Seite 124
CONTROLS
Displays
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Safety information
WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of road. There is a
risk of an accident. Modify your driving style to
the weather conditions at low temperatures.
Time
The time is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The time can be set on the Control Display.
Date
The date is displayed in the Onboard Computer.
The date and date format can be set on the Con‐
trol Display.
Range
Display
The following information about the range is dis‐
played:
▷ Fill level bars of the fuel gauge, arrow 1.
▷ Charge state of the high-voltage battery, ar‐
row 2.
▷ Range for electric driving in MAX eDRIVE
mode, arrow 3.
▷ Total range from fuel supply and electric
range, arrow 4.
Two Check Control messages indicate a limited
total range.
The range display is dynamic and is influenced
by several factors, such as driving style.
Follow further information on refueling.
Service requirements
Concept
The function displays the service requirements
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
General information
The driving distance or the time to the next
scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly in the
instrument cluster after standby state is switched
on.
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
ice requirements from your remote control.
Display
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the type of service required
may be displayed on the Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed information.
Seite 125
Displays
CONTROLS
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently required.
The deadline for scheduled
maintenance or a legally man‐
dated inspection is approaching.
The service deadline has already
passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally man‐
dated vehicle inspections is automatically trans‐
mitted to your dealer’s service center before your
vehicle is due for service.
You can check when your dealer’s service center
was notified.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Teleservice Call"
Gear shift indicator
Concept
The system recommends the most fuel efficient
gear for the current driving situation.
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, the gear shift indicator may be active
in the manual mode of the Steptronic transmis‐
sion.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The gear shift indicator is not available when Max
eDRIVE is activated.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐
gaged gear is displayed.
Displaying
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
General information
The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐
tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well
as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic signs
with extra symbols for wet road conditions, etc.,
Seite 126
CONTROLS
Displays
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
are also detected and compared with the vehi‐
cle's onboard data, such as from the rain sensor,
and will be displayed depending on the situation.
The system takes into account the information
stored in the navigation system and also displays
speed limits present on routes without signs.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Speed limit information"
If Speed Limit Info is switched on, it can be dis‐
played on the Info Display in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Display
Speed Limit Info
Current speed limit.
Speed Limit Info not available.
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the
Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and may
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed by
objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
as due to changes in road routing.
Seite 127
Displays
CONTROLS
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed
sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
Selection lists
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the fol‐
lowing can be displayed or operated using the
buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering
wheel as well as the displays in the instrument
cluster and the Head-up Display:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
It also displays programs of the Driving Dynamics
Control.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the
thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list.
1.
Turn the thumbwheel and select the desired
setting.
2. Press the thumbwheel.
Display
Depending on the equipment version, the list in
the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐
tration.
Onboard Computer
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐
cle data in the instrument cluster, such as aver‐
age values.
Calling up information on the Info
Display
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Information is displayed in the Info Display of the
instrument cluster. Pressing the button repeat‐
edly displays additional information.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig‐
nal lever calls up the following information in the
Info Display:
Seite 128
CONTROLS
Displays
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ Miles.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Current consumption, fuel.
▷ Average consumption, electric.
▷ Current consumption, electric.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Speed Limit Info.
▷ Time of arrival.
▷ Distance to destination.
Selecting information
You can select what information from the On‐
board Computer is to be displayed on the Info
Display of the instrument cluster.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired setting.
Display in the instrument cluster
The information from the Onboard Computer is
shown in the lower left area of the instrument
cluster.
Information in detail
Total range
The total range considers the ca‐
pacity of the fuel tank as well as
the electric energy in the high-
voltage battery.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated on
the basis of various distances. Standstill with
drive-ready state switched off is not considered.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current energy consumption. The
efficiency of the driving can be monitored.
Average speed
Periods when vehicle is parked with drive-ready
state switched off are not included when calcu‐
lating average speed.
Resetting average values
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Time of arrival
The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a
destination is entered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Distance to destination
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the dis‐
tance remaining to the destination is displayed if
a destination is entered in the navigation system
before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted auto‐
matically.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
Seite 129
Displays
CONTROLS
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Onboard Computer on the Control
Display
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐
cle data on the Control Display, such as average
values.
General information
Two types of Onboard Computers are available
on the Control Display:
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as the
fuel consumption, are displayed. The values
can be reset individually.
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an over‐
view of a certain distance and can be reset as
often as necessary.
Calling up the Onboard Computer or trip
computer
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the Onboard Computer
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"
Resetting the trip computer
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ "Reset": all values are reset.
▷ "Automatic reset": all values are reset
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
5. If necessary, "OK"
Speed warning
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued.
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐
ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐
ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
speed warning
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is
displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"
Seite 130
CONTROLS
Displays
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Setting your current speed as the
speed warning
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
Head-up Display
Concept
This system projects important information into
the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed.
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
Overview
Switching on/off
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation instructions.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed briefly
as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up Display
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Displayed information"
6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
Seite 131
Displays
CONTROLS
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐
tionally influenced using the instrument lighting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Adjusting the height
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Height"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is
reached.
7. Press the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Rotation"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
selected.
7. Press the Controller.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic settings
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-up
Display, refer to page 242.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible to
display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double images
from being displayed.
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have
the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop, if necessary.
Sport displays in the Head-up
Display
General information
The sport displays in the Head-up Display assist
with a sporty driving style.
With navigation system: if the sport displays are
active in the Head-up Display, the navigation
content will be displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Functional requirements
▷ M/S manual mode of the Steptronic Sport
transmission, refer to page 113, is activated.
▷ Dynamic driving style and achievement of
higher speeds.
Seite 132
CONTROLS
Displays
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Display
1 Current engine speed, highlighted
2 Shift point indicator
3 Pre-warning field, speed display
4 Red warning field, speed display
5 Speed
6 Gear display/warning messages
Shift point indicator
Concept
Shift point indicator in the Head-up Display indi‐
cates the optimum shifting point. Thus, with a
sporty driving style, the best possible vehicle ac‐
celeration is achieved.
Display
Successive yellow and red illuminated fields indi‐
cate the upcoming shift point. As soon as the
last red field illuminates, the optimum shift point
has been reached. The vehicle shifts up to the
next gear automatically, if the higher gear is not
engaged manually.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per‐
formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": status of the Tire
Pressure Monitor, refer to page 142.
▷ "Engine oil level": Electronic engine oil
level check, refer to page 224.
▷ "Check Control": Check Control mes‐
sages are stored in the background and can
be displayed on the Control Display. Display‐
ing stored Check Control messages, refer to
page 123.
▷ "Service required": Displaying service
requirements, refer to page 125.
▷ "Teleservice Call": service request.
Seite 133
Displays
CONTROLS
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
Symbol Function
Automatic headlight control.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Symbol Function
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Parking lights, low beams and
roadside parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when standby state
is switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
cally switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and
it would then be impossible to start the engine.
When parking, switch on the one-sided roadside
parking light, refer to page 134.
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams illuminate when standby state is
switched on.
Roadside parking light
Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Seite 134
CONTROLS
Lights
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Switching on
With standby state switched off, press the lever
either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
the opposite direction.
Welcome lights and headlight
courtesy delay feature
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the
ambient brightness, individual light functions may
be switched on briefly when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch:
,
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Welcome lights"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlight flasher is switched on after the radio-
ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Set length of time.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Automatic headlight control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off automat‐
ically depending on the ambient brightness, for
instance in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐
cipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
Activating
Position of switch:
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐
luminated when the low beams are switched on.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot serve as
a substitute for your personal judgment of light‐
ing conditions.
Seite 135
Lights
CONTROLS
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under
these conditions, you should always switch on
the lights manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when
standby state is switched on. After standby state
is switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
tion .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Adaptive headlight range
control
The adaptive headlight range control compen‐
sates for acceleration and braking operations in
order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to
achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.
High-beam Assistant
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically switches
the high beams on or off depending on the traffic
situation.
General information
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic sit‐
uation allows. In the low speed range, the high
beams are not switched on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐
bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.
The high beams can be switched on and off
manually at any time.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle
equipment: ,
Press and hold button on signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter is illuminated when the low beams are
switched on.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instrument
cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 106.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the
button on the turn signal lever.
Seite 136
CONTROLS
Lights
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when
to use the high beams. In situation that require
this, therefore switch off manually.
The system is not fully functional in the following
situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐
sary:
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such
as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Laser high beams
Concept
When the high beams are switched-on, starting
with a speed of approx. 44 mph/70 km/h, the la‐
ser high beams in the headlight are automatically
switched on in addition to the LED high beams.
The range of the high beams is increased and
ensures an even better illumination of the road.
General information
Depending on the country variant, further infor‐
mation can be obtained from the laser label on
the headlight.
Safety information
The label is in the headlight and is visible from
the outside.
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
Settings
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the interior lights,
footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy lights
are controlled automatically.
Thumbwheel for the instrument lighting controls
brightness of some of these features.
Seite 137
Lights
CONTROLS
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Overview
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
Switching the interior lights on/off
Press button.
To switch off permanently: press the button and
hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Switching the reading lights on/off
Press button.
Reading lights are located in the front next to the
interior light.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐
rior.
Selecting color scheme
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Lighting design"
6. Select the desired setting.
To deactivate the ambient light: "Off".
Setting the brightness
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 138
CONTROLS
Lights
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and the
front passenger by responding to frontal impacts
in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate protection.
Side airbag
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the
head.
Seite 139
Safety
CONTROLS
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side im‐
pact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal im‐
pact.
Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, for instance in less severe accidents or rear-
end collisions.
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
WARNING
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag
system cannot provide protection as intended
and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐
gering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. Follow the information on achieving the op‐
timum protective effect of the airbag system.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as
possible when the airbag is triggered.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in
the floor area and does not support them on
the dashboard.
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐
mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐
son.
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐
senger side must stay clear - do not attach
adhesive labels or coverings and do not at‐
tach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS
devices or mobile phones.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag
cover panels, do not cover them or modify
them in any way.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats with
integrated side airbags.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
ets, over the backrests.
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐
not be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW
Customer Relations for further information.
Warnings and information on the airbags are also
found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Safety information
WARNING
Individual components can be hot after trigger‐
ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Do not touch individual components.
Seite 140
CONTROLS
Safety
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the
airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the
airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐
spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐
juries or danger to life. Have the airbag system
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Correct function
With the standby state switched on, the
warning light in the instrument cluster
lights up briefly, indicating the airbag sys‐
tem and belt tensioner are functional.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Warning light does not come on when
standby state is switched on.
▷ The warning light lights up continuously.
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat passenger airbags
Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐
ance.
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are activated or deactivated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
Safety information
WARNING
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
function, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐
ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐
senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.
Malfunction of the automatic deactivation
system
When transporting older children and adults, the
front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated
in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐
cator light for the front-seat passenger airbags
lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion.
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat.
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐
tem is to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Seite 141
Safety
CONTROLS
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Indicator light for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbags indicates the operating state of the front-
seat passenger airbags.
The light indicates whether the airbags are either
activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator light lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint sys‐
tem or when the seat is
empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for
instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐
cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐
bags on the front passenger side are acti‐
vated.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children seated in
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point
in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐
ter installing a child restraint system, make sure
that the indicator light for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child
restraint system has been detected and the
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/front-
seat passenger airbags very much depends on
the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as
a respective message appears on the Control
Display.
Calibrating the front seats
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
1.
Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward, until it stops.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still
moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when the
message on the Control Display disappears.
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a repeat
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system warns you if
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires.
Seite 142
CONTROLS
Safety
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
General information
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐
tion pressure and, depending on the model, the
tire temperature.
With use of the system follow further information
found under Tire inflation pressure, refer to
page 212.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for the
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset was
performed with the correct tire inflation pres‐
sure.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted
to a new value, a reset was performed.
▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
Status display
Current status
The system status can be displayed on the Con‐
trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is ac‐
tive.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The current status is displayed.
Tire conditions
General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the color
of the wheels and a SMS text message on the
Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning related
to the tire inflation pressures stored during the
last reset.
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pres‐
sure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
losses.
Possible causes:
▷ Malfunction.
▷ The system is being reset.
Additonal information
The status control display additionally shows the
current tire inflation pressures and, depending on
the model, tire temperatures. It shows the actual
values read; they may vary depending on driving
style or weather conditions.
Resetting the system
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not drive
off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the follow‐
ing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure
Monitor…".
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The reset is com‐
pleted automatically while driving.
After a successfully completed reset, the wheels
on the Control Display are shown in green and
Seite 143
Safety
CONTROLS
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
"Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for
recommended pressures." is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you
continue the reset resumes automatically.
Messages
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC
Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on.
Safety information
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
steering and braking response. There is a risk
of an accident. Do not continue driving. Repair
the flat tire or replace the wheel.
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
The system has detected a wheel
change, but no reset was done.
Inflation was not carried out according
to specifications.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last confirma‐
tion.
Measure
1.
Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Carry out a reset of the system after a tire
change.
At low tire inflation pressure
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system therefore issues a
warning based on the tire inflation
pressures before the last reset.
Measure
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Do not
keep driving and contact a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
If no tire repair kit is available, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
System limits
Temperature
The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's
temperature.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire infla‐
tion pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
tire temperature falls again.
These circumstances may cause a warning
when temperatures fall very sharply.
Sudden tire pressure loss
The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire
damage caused by external circumstances.
Seite 144
CONTROLS
Safety
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Failure to perform a reset
The system does not function properly if a reset
has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire is
reported though tire inflation pressures are cor‐
rect.
Malfunction
The yellow warning light flashes and is
then illuminated continuously. A Check
Control message is displayed. It may not
be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
Examples and recommendations in the following
situations:
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have system checked by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
▷ The system was unable to complete the re‐
set. Perform a system reset again.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leaving
the area of the interference, the system auto‐
matically becomes active again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS
138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi‐
cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire in‐
flation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the ve‐
hicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pres‐
sure for those tires.) As an added safety feature,
your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres‐
sure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi‐
nates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi‐
cle's handling and stopping ability. Please note
that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐
mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to de‐
tect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al‐
ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve‐
hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the
driver assistance system.
The intelligent safety systems can help prevent
an imminent collision.
▷ Approach control warning with City light brak‐
ing function, refer to page 146.
Seite 145
Safety
CONTROLS
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ Person warning with City light braking func‐
tion, refer to page 149.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system might not output warn‐
ings or reactions or these might be output late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off accord‐
ing to their respective settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored
for the profile currently used.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Approach control warning with
City light braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an ac‐
cident cannot be prevented, the system will help
reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and activates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done with
limited force and duration.
A camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐
trols the system.
The approach control warning is available even if
cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle in‐
tentionally, the approach control warning and
Seite 146
CONTROLS
Safety
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tem reactions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are taken
into account.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system might not output warn‐
ings or reactions or these might be output late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
Seite 147
Safety
CONTROLS
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety system is
displayed. The systems are individually
switched off according to their respective
settings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are
stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
5. Select the desired setting.
The selected time is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
Brake and make an evasive maneuver,
if necessary.
Prewarning
This warning is issued, for instance when there is
the impending danger of a collision or the dis‐
tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there is
a prewarning.
Acute warning with braking function
Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there is
an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is as‐
sisted by a minor automatic braking intervention
in a possible risk of collision.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to react. During
a warning, the maximum braking force is used.
Prerequisite for the brake booster is sufficiently
quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal. If
there is a risk of collision, the system may assist
with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a
low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete
stop.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
moving the steering wheel.
Seite 148
CONTROLS
Safety
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and functional
restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
rectly, or without justification due to the system
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Follow the information re‐
garding the system limits and actively intervene
if needed.
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐
activated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera in the mirror
is dirty or obscured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
established.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for
example the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐
actions.
Person warning with City light
braking function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents with pe‐
destrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐
sue a warning if there is imminent risk of a colli‐
sion with pedestrians, and support this with a
light braking function.
The camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐
trols the system.
General information
With sufficient brightness, the system warns
about possible collision danger with pedestrians
starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.
35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking before
a collision.
The system reacts to people who are within the
detection range of the system.
Seite 149
Safety
CONTROLS
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left
of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located
within the central area. A warning is issued about
pedestrians who are located within the extended
area only if they are moving in the direction of the
central area.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
WARNING
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system might not output warn‐
ings or reactions or these might be output late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
are individually switched off accord‐
ing to their respective settings.
Seite 150
CONTROLS
Safety
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are
stored for the driver profile currently in use.
Press button again:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way is
imminent, a warning symbol appears on the in‐
strument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to react. During
a warning, the maximum braking force is used.
Prerequisite for the brake booster is sufficiently
quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal. If
there is a risk of collision, the system may assist
with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a
low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete
stop.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
moving the steering wheel.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
limitations of the detection range and functional
restrictions.
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
rectly, or without justification due to the system
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Follow the information re‐
garding the system limits and actively intervene
if needed.
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is limited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected:
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐
cause of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐
activated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
established.
Seite 151
Safety
CONTROLS
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Brake force display
Concept
Additional brake lights indicate emergency brak‐
ing to the traffic behind. This can reduce the risk
of a rear-end collision.
General information
▷ During normal brake application, the top
brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the lower
brake lights additionally light up.
Seite 152
CONTROLS
Safety
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐
ing.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing ac‐
tive safety.
ABS is ready when vehicle is ready to drive.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically boosts the vehicle braking capabil‐
ity to the furthest possible extent. It reduces the
braking distance to a minimum during emer‐
gency stop. This system utilizes all of the capa‐
bilities provided by the Antilock Brake System
ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
engine speed and by applying brakes to the indi‐
vidual wheels.
A change in the drive type, refer to page 65, can
be made to improve traction.
General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐
ditions, for instance:
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 154, is a version of the DSC where forward
momentum is optimized.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Seite 153
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
DSC OFF button
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
General information
Depending on the operating state of the high-
voltage system, the drive of the vehicle automati‐
cally switches between front-wheel, rear-wheel
and four-wheel drive. If DSC is deactivated, this
may result in automatic change of the drive type
for unstable driving situations.
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not lon‐
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator light for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.
DSC is switched off.
The steering and, depending on the equipment,
suspension are tuned for sporty driving.
Activating DSC
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
Automatic activation
When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation
occurs in the following situations:
▷ The high-voltage battery has an insufficient
charge.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRACTION
or DSC OFF mode.
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
Concept
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability
Control where forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum headway on spe‐
cial road conditions or loose road surfaces, for in‐
stance unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐
what limited driving stability.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Drive carefully.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐
der the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-
covered roads.
▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose
ground.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
Traction Control
Activating DTC
Press button.
Seite 154
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster
and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of the
vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked
individually when a sporty driving style is used.
The resulting braking power is simultaneously
largely compensated by an engine intervention.
Due to the variable drive configuration, this inter‐
vention can be done either on the front axle, the
rear axle or on both axles simultaneously.
Driving Dynamics Control
Concept
The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine-tune
the vehicle's settings and features. Various pro‐
grams can be selected for this purpose.
Information
Pressing the Driving Dynamics Control deacti‐
vates the Sport program, refer to page 113, of
the vehicle. The selector lever automatically
switches out of the Sport program in selector
lever position D. Use the Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol to select the COMFORT or ECO PRO pro‐
grams.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Operating the programs
Driving Dynamics Control Program
COMFORT
ECO PRO
COMFORT
Concept
For balanced tuning.
With each starting operation, COMFORT is acti‐
vated using the Start/Stop button.
Activating COMFORT
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
ECO PRO
Concept
ECO PRO, refer to page 194, provides consis‐
tent tuning to maximize range.
Comfort functions and the engine Controller are
adjusted.
Seite 155
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
The program can be configured to individual
specifications.
Reducing the energy recovery of the high-volt‐
age battery optimizes consumption. The vehicle
is operated more frequently in the coasting driv‐
ing condition.
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure ECO PRO"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Displays
Selected program
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on uphill grades.
The parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off assistant
1.
Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without
delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer is
used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
Seite 156
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain areas.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
WARNING
The use of the system can lead to an increased
risk of accidents in the following situations,
for instance:
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
property. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible.
WARNING
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, interrupting, re‐
fer to page 158.
Store speed, refer to page 158.
Resume speed, continue cruise con‐
trol, refer to page 159.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to page 158.
Seite 157
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up.
Desired speed becomes current speed
and will be displayed - beside the symbol
- in the Info Display.
Cruise control can be used.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Switching off
Press button on the steering wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
ton.
Press button.
Changing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.
Seite 158
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐
ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on
the accelerator pedal.
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
tional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Calling up stored speed
Press button on the steering wheel.
The stored speed is reached again and main‐
tained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator light
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
ped, the indicator light in the instrument
cluster indicates whether the system is
switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed
The desired speed is displayed next to
the symbol in the Info Display.
▷ Display lights up green: system is ac‐
tive, the display indicates the desired
speed.
▷ Display lights up orange: system is inter‐
rupted, the display indicates the stored
speed.
▷ No display: system is switched off.
Status display
Selected desired speed.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be displayed
in the Head-up Display.
System limits
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if en‐
gine power is insufficient.
Seite 159
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
PDC Park Distance Control
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. The system de‐
tects objects behind the vehicle. If the vehicle is
equipped with front PDC, objects in front of the
vehicle are detected too. Objects that you are
approaching slowly are indicated by signal tones
and a display on the Control Display.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐
tances are located in the bumpers.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the following
situations:
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear corner
sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the ob‐
ject.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at a distance to
the object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance
Control is activated, the warning can be de‐
layed due to physical circumstances. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control
is not yet active.
Overview
With front PDC: button in vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
for instance in the bumpers.
Functional requirements
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
ers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
Seite 160
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged while
the engine is running or in electric mode.
The rearview camera also switches on.
▷ If equipped with front PDC: when obstacles
are detected behind or in front of the vehicle
by PDC and the speed is slower than approx.
2.5 mph/4 km/h.
You may switch automatic activation on and off
when obstacles are detected. Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending on
the vehicle equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activation
on obstacle detection, for instance in vehicle
washes, to reduce false alarms.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
With front PDC: switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐
verse gear is engaged when pressing the park
assistance button.
WARNING
Signal tones
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
is approaching an object. E.g., if an object is de‐
tected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone
sounds from the left rear speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
If the distance to a detected object in the front is
less than approx. 12 inches/30 cm and in the rear
less than approx. 20 inches/50 cm, a continuous
tone is sounded.
With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously lo‐
cated both in front of and behind the vehicle, an
alternating continuous signal is sounded.
The signal tone is switched off, when selector
lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
Steptronic transmission.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Tone"
4. "Volume settings"
5. "PDC"
6. Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Seite 161
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Control
Display before a signal sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance Con‐
trol (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. "Rear view camera"
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
rectly, or without justification due to the system
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Follow the information re‐
garding the system limits and actively intervene
if needed.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
for instance from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐
fall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no obsta‐
cle within the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for instance in underground ga‐
rages.
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
Seite 162
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activation
on obstacle detection, for instance in vehicle
washes, to reduce false alarms.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Red symbol is displayed, and the range
of the sensors is dimmed on the Control
Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Surround View
Concept
Surround View comprises various camera assis‐
tance systems that help the driver when parking,
maneuvering, and at complex exits and intersec‐
tions.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 163.
▷ Top View, refer to page 166.
▷ Side View, refer to page 168.
Rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.
Overview
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Camera
The camera lens is located between the license
plate lights.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
necessary, clean the camera lens.
Seite 163
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically switched on if selec‐
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine
is running or the drive-ready state is switched on.
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The parking assistance functions are shown on
the Control Display.
Switching the view via iDrive
If the rearview camera view is not displayed,
change the view via iDrive:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems and
trailers that are not connected to a trailer
power socket can lead to malfunctions.
Activating assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Obstacles are marked, depending on the ve‐
hicle equipment.
Pathway lines
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐
age of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐
quired when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering
angle and are continuously adjusted to the steer‐
ing wheel movements.
Seite 164
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after the
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
Obstacle marking
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, obstacles
behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park
Distance Control sensors and the rearview cam‐
era.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacle
markings can be faded into the image of the
rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings
match the markings of the PDC Park Distance
Control.
Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning radius
lines lead to within the limits of the parking
space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
reached, and press the Controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. Select the symbol.
Seite 165
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
3. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
reached, and press the Controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐
sistance functions also consider data from the
PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance from the objects on the display.
Top View
Concept
Top View provides assistance in parking and ma‐
neuvering. The area around the vehicle is shown
on the Control Display.
General information
The image is captured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors, by the rearview
camera and a camera on the front of the vehicle.
The range is no more than approx. 6.5 ft/2 m to
the side, front and rear.
Obstacles within this range are thus displayed
early on the Control Display.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Cameras
Front camera
Rearview camera
Seite 166
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Cameras at the bottom in the mirror housings.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If re‐
quired, clean the camera lenses.
Functional requirements
Top View can be used only to a limited extent in
the following situations:
▷ With a door open.
▷ With the tailgate open.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.
▷ In poor light.
The unavailable camera range is depicted by
shading.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine
is running.
The rearview camera image is displayed. To
switch to the Top View:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. "Rear view camera"
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Top View is displayed.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐
verse gear is engaged when pressing the park
assistance button.
Display
Display on the Control Display
The area surrounding the vehicle can be dis‐
played on the Control Display.
The display appears as soon as Top View is acti‐
vated.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, it is possible to switch to top view:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. "Rear view camera"
Brightness
With Top View switched on:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
reached, and press the Controller.
Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
reached, and press the Controller.
Seite 167
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Displaying the turning radius and pathway
lines
▷ The static, red turning radius line shows the
space needed to the side of the vehicle when
the steering wheel is turned all the way.
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists you
in assessing the amount of space actually
needed to the side of the vehicle.
The lane line depends on the engaged gear
and the current steering angle. The track line
is continuously adjusted for the steering
wheel movement.
1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. "Parking aid lines"
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed.
System limits
A Check Control message is displayed when a
camera is not working.
Side View
Concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road users
concealed by obstacles to the left and right of
the vehicle can only be detected relatively late
from the driver's seat. To improve the viewing,
each camera, front and rear on the vehicle, de‐
tects the traffic area on the side.
Which camera is active is shown on the top edge
of the screen.
Safety information
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Side View
Cameras
Front camera
Seite 168
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Rear camera
Two cameras are used for the detection.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 242.
Switching on/off
Switching on/off manually
Press button.
Depending on the transmission position, the pic‐
ture of the front or rear camera is displayed.
Switching off automatically
By switching into a different function or when
changing gears.
Front Side View: when a certain driving distance
or speed is exceeded.
Display
General information
The traffic area in front of or behind the vehicle is
displayed on the Control Display.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
1.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
reached, and press the Controller.
Contrast
With the Side View switched on:
1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
reached, and press the Controller.
Warning of crossing traffic
Concept
When an object approaching from the side is de‐
tected by the front or rear camera, this is de‐
picted by a symbol in the Side View display.
Requirements
▷ Side View switched on.
▷ Your vehicle moves no faster than walking
speed.
▷ To detect approaching objects, sufficient
brightness, for instance daylight is necessary.
Display
The yellow symbol is displayed if an ap‐
proaching vehicle is detected by the
camera.
A gray symbol is displayed if crossing
traffic cannot be detected.
System limits
In the following situations, the warning about
crossing traffic may be limited:
▷ In poor lighting or visibility conditions.
▷ If the camera is soiled or covered.
System limits
The objects displayed on the Control Display un‐
der certain circumstances are closer than they
appear. Therefore, do not estimate the distance
from the objects on the display.
The viewing angle is approx. 180°.
Seite 169
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Interior air quality
The air quality inside the vehicle is improved by
an emissions-tested interior, a microfilter, and a
climate-control system for regulating tempera‐
ture, air flow, and recirculated-air mode.
In addition there are other functions which de‐
pend on the vehicle's equipment, for instance
microfilter/activated-charcoal filter, automatic cli‐
mate control with automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol AUC, and parked-car ventilation.
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left 90
2 Temperature, left
3 SYNC program
4 Display
5 Maximum cooling
6 Temperature, right
7 Seat heating, right 90
8 Switching off the system
9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
10 AUTO program
11 Air flow, AUTO intensity
Seite 170
CONTROLS
Climate control
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
12 Manual air distribution
13 Defrosting windows and removing condensa‐
tion
14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
clear
15 Rear window defroster
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ SYNC program.
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Seat heating.
Switching off
Press button.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary
by using the maximum cooling or heating power,
and then keeps it constant.
Settings
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
The selected temperature is shown on the dis‐
play of the automatic climate control.
The automatic climate control reaches this tem‐
perature as quickly as possible, if needed, by in‐
creasing the cooling or heating output, and then
keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
To reduce the energy consumption, the cooling
or heating output is reduced in ECO-PRO mode,
refer to page 194. ECO PRO is shown on the
display of the automatic climate control.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
General information
The function is available above an external tem‐
perature of approximately 32 ℉/0 ℃ and when
the engine is running, or when the electrical
drive-ready state is available.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow ac‐
tive.
AUTO program
Concept
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are con‐
trolled automatically.
Switching on/off
Press button.
Depending on the selected temperature, the in‐
tensity of the AUTO program, and outside influ‐
Seite 171
Climate control
CONTROLS
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
ences, the air is directed to the windshield, side
windows, upper body, and into the floor area.
The air conditioning is switched on automatically
with the AUTO program.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐
densation as much as possible.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribution.
Intensity
With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐
sity can be set. This changes the automatic con‐
trol for the air flow and air distribution.
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
Concept
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC rec‐
ognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air.
The outside air supply is shut off and the interior
air is recirculated.
General information
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐
tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off
automatically.
If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐
ously flows into the car's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and the fog‐
ging of the windows increases.
Switching on/off
Press button repeatedly to select an op‐
erating mode:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside
air and shuts off automatically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the sup‐
ply of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environmental
conditions.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the re‐
circulated-air mode and press the AUTO button
to utilize the condensation sensor. Make sure
that air can flow to the windshield.
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
General information
To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Operation
Press the left or right side of the button:
decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control may
be reduced automatically to save battery power.
Controlling the air distribution manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
justed manually.
Seite 172
CONTROLS
Climate control
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Operation
Press button repeatedly to select a pro‐
gram:
▷ Windows.
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and upper body region.
▷ Windows and floor area.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.
The selected air distribution is shown on the dis‐
play of the automatic climate control.
If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
SYNC program
Concept
The system enables the transfer of current set‐
tings on the driver's side for temperature, air
flow, air distribution, and the AUTO program to
the front passenger side and to the left and right
rear.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The current setting of the temperature
on the driver's side is transferred to the front
passenger side.
The program is switched off if the setting on the
front passenger side is changed.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from
the windshield and the front side windows.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
For this purpose, point the side vents towards
the side windows as needed.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow ac‐
tive.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the air conditioning or press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches off
automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated-air mode the microfil‐
ter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and
gaseous pollutants out of the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 230.
Ventilation
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and
closing of the vent, arrow 1.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 2.
Seite 173
Climate control
CONTROLS
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Adjusting the ventilation
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Direct vent in your direction when car's inte‐
rior is too hot.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
Stationary climate control
Concept
Stationary climate control cools or heats the car's
interior prior to departure to a comfortable tem‐
perature.
The interior temperature is lowered with high
cooling output.
The system may heat the car's interior. Snow
and ice can be removed more easily.
General information
The stationary climate control can be switched
on and off directly or via a pre-set departure time.
▷ Direct operation, refer to page 174.
▷ Preselected departure times, refer to
page 175.
With the BMW Connected app, refer to
page 175, the stationary climate control can be
switched on.
The air automatically exits through the vents to
the windshield, the side windows, the upper
body region and into the floor area.
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time.
If stationary climate control is used during the
charging process, less air conditioning capacity
will be required while driving. This optimizes the
range.
Functional requirements
▷ Motor switched off and/or drive-ready state
deactivated.
▷ High-voltage battery sufficiently charged or
charging cable connected.
If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis‐
charged, it can take some time after connect‐
ing the charging cable, until the stationary cli‐
mate control will be functional.
▷ Departure time preselected: depends on the
internal, external, and set desired tempera‐
ture.
▷ Direct operation via iDrive: does not depend
on the external temperature.
▷ The vents are open to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
Concept
The system can be switched on or off directly.
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time.
Via iDrive
The system can be switched on or off via iDrive.
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Activate now"
Via BMW display key
The system can be switched on or off via the
BMW display key.
Switching on
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3. "On"
Switching off
1.
Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
Seite 174
CONTROLS
Climate control
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
2. "Precondit. setting"
3. "Off"
Climate control at departure time
Concept
Different departure times can be adjusted to en‐
sure a comfortable interior temperature in the ve‐
hicle at the time of departure.
The activation time is automatically determined
based on the temperature.
The system promptly switches on before the se‐
lected departure time.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
▷ Set departure times.
▷ Activate departure times.
General information
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can
be made on the Control Display. Departure time
can only be changed once. Scheduled departure
times are not adjusted. Settings for climate con‐
trol and charging process are also applied for
scheduled departure times.
Setting departure times
Via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Plan comfort climate"
6. Set the desired departure time, refer to
page 205.
Activating the departure time
Functional requirement
If a departure time is to influence the switching
on of the stationary climate control, the respec‐
tive departure time must be activated first.
Via iDrive
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Plan comfort climate"
6. "Precondition for departure"
Activate the desired departure time.
Display
The symbol on the automatic climate control
lights up when the departure time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes when the stationary climate control has
been switched on.
Activating with the BMW Connected
app
Using an appropriate BMW Connected app with
remote function, the system can be switched on
directly or via a preset departure time.
Seite 175
Climate control
CONTROLS
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Integrated Universal Remote
Control
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of
remote-controlled systems, such as garage door
drives, barriers, or lighting systems. The
Integrated Universal Remote Control replaces up
to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate
the remote control, the buttons on the interior
mirror must be programmed with the desired
functions. The hand-held transmitter for the par‐
ticular system is required in order to program the
remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐
tions for the sake of security.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating re‐
mote-controlled systems, such as the garage
door, using the integrated Universal Remote
Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the owner's manual of the system to
be controlled, the system is generally
compatible with the integrated Universal Remote
Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Control elements on the interior
mirror
▷ LED, arrow 1.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
Programming
General information
1.
Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Seite 176
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐
mately 20 seconds until the LED on the inte‐
rior mirror flashes. This erases all program‐
ming of the buttons on the interior mirror.
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system
to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to
8 cm away from the buttons of the interior
mirror. The required distance depends on the
hand-held transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button of
the desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter and the button to be programmed on
the interior mirror. The LED on the interior
mirror will begin flashing slowly.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing faster
indicates that the button on the interior mirror
has been programmed.
If the LED does not flash faster after at least
60 seconds, change the distance between
the interior mirror and the hand-held trans‐
mitter and repeat the step. Several more at‐
tempts at different distances may be neces‐
sary. Wait at least 15 seconds between
attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
6.
To program other functions on other buttons,
repeat steps 3 to 5.
The systems can be controlled using the interior
mirror buttons.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system after re‐
peated programming, please check if the system
to be controlled features a rolling code radio sys‐
tem.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press the
programmed button on the interior mirror longer.
If the LED on the interior mirror starts flashing
rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 sec‐
onds, the system features a rolling code radio
system. Flashing and continuous illumination of
the LED will repeat for approximately 20 sec‐
onds.
For systems with a rolling code radio system, the
integrated Universal Remote Control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out how
to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
person.
Synchronizing the universal remote control with
the system:
1.
Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system.
2. Program the desired button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed. You have
approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐
terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and
then release it. If necessary, repeat this step
up to three times in order to finish synchroni‐
zation. Once synchronization is complete, the
programmed function will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1.
Switch on standby state.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be
programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmit‐
ter for the system to be controlled approx. 1
to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the but‐
tons of the interior mirror. The required dis‐
tance depends on the hand-held transmitter.
Seite 177
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the
desired function on the hand-held transmit‐
ter.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior
mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The LED
flashing faster indicates that the button on
the interior mirror has been programmed.
The system can then be controlled by the
button on the interior mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at most
60 seconds, change the distance and repeat
the programming starting with step 4. Several
more attempts at different distances may be
necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between
attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
Operation
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating re‐
mote-controlled systems, such as the garage
door, using the integrated Universal Remote
Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐
erated using the button on the interior mirror
while the engine is running or when the standby
state is switched on. To do this, hold down the
button within receiving range of the system until
the function is activated. The interior mirror LED
stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐
mitted.
Deleting stored functions
All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
tions cannot be deleted individually. Press and
hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror
simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds un‐
til the LED on the interior mirror flashes rapidly.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind
a cover.
Sockets
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment when standby and drive-
ready state are switched on.
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the
airbags, such as portable navigation devices,
can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be
thrown around in the car's interior during un‐
folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
devices and cables are not in the airbag's area
of unfolding.
Seite 178
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can
work with high voltages and currents, which
means that the 12 volt on-board network can
be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of
damage to property. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
Center console
The socket is located between the front seats.
Remove the cover.
USB interface
Concept
Mobile devices with USB port can be connected
to the USB interface.
General information
Follow the information regarding the connection
of mobile devices to the USB interface in the
section on USB connections, refer to page 56.
Overview
The USB interface is located between the front
seats.
Connecting an external device
Follow the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐
tor into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
chanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB media avail‐
able on the market, it cannot be guaranteed
that every device is operable on the vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
peratures; refer to the owner's manual of the
device.
▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐
niques, proper playback of the media stored
on the USB storage device cannot be guar‐
anteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB storage device will be sup‐
plied with charging current via the USB inter‐
face if the device supports this. At higher
temperatures, the USB storage device may
cause a reduction in the charging current.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB storage device via
the onboard socket, when it is connected to
the USB interface.
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device is
being used, settings may be required on the
Seite 179
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
USB storage device, refer to the owner's
manual of the device.
Non-compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Cargo area
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed or the tailgate dam‐
aged when operating the tailgate. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE
During driving, high temperatures can occur in
the cargo area. Objects in the cargo area can
heat up. There is a risk of damage to property.
Do not store temperature-sensitive objects in
the cargo area.
Partition in the cargo area
The partition can be removed to transport larger
items.
Cargo cover
General information
The cargo cover is located under the tailgate.
The cover can be folded forward or removed to
load bulky luggage.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
Removing
Raise the cover, arrow 1, and pull it back to re‐
move, arrow 2.
Installing
Place the cover in the brackets and fold it down.
Seite 180
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
NOTE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐
age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not use anti-slip pads.
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are availa‐
ble in the car's interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 181.
▷ Trays between the front seats, refer to
page 182.
▷ Net in the front passenger floor area, refer to
page 182
▷ Rear seat, refer to page 182.
▷ Cargo area, refer to page 180
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
partment can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
glove compartment immediately after using it.
Opening
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Seite 181
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the glove
compartment.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
Between the front seats
Center armrest
Open
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
To open, pull upward, arrow.
Front cup holder
Safety information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder and hot
beverages can damage the cup holder and in‐
crease the risk of injury in the event of an acci‐
dent. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Use light-weight, unbreakable, and
sealable containers. Do not transport hot bever‐
ages. Do not force objects into the cup holder.
Overview
Between the seats.
Net in the front passenger floor
area
The net in the front passenger floor area can be
used to store small parts.
Rear seat
Rear cup holder
Safety information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder and hot
beverages can damage the cup holder and in‐
crease the risk of injury in the event of an acci‐
dent. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Use light-weight, unbreakable, and
sealable containers. Do not transport hot bever‐
ages. Do not force objects into the cup holder.
Seite 182
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Overview
In the rear center console.
Seite 183
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ........................................................ 186
Loading ..................................................................................................... 191
Increasing the range ............................................................................... 193
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to begin working together
smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to ach‐
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Control.
Safety information
WARNING
Due to new parts and components, safety and
driver assistance systems can react with a de‐
lay. There is a risk of an accident. After instal‐
ling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive con‐
servatively and intervene early if necessary.
Observe the break-in procedures of the re‐
spective parts and components.
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed:
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstan‐
ces.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Using eDRIVE efficiently
Concept
eDRIVE operates automatically. Proactive driving
utilizes energy consumption and energy recovery
optimally. Energy recovery is used to charge the
high-voltage battery. Energy recovery is impor‐
tant for the supply of electrical components and
thus a prerequisite for an extensive range. En‐
ergy consumption and recovery depend very
much, among other things, on your driving style.
Seite 186
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Optimizing driving style
Performance display
Your driving style can be optimized using the
performance display in ECO PRO mode.
Your driving style is efficient as long as the accel‐
erator pedal pointer is within the lower range
highlighted in blue during acceleration and decel‐
eration.
The energy recovery occurs during coasting and
braking and is displayed in the performance dis‐
play by the accelerator pedal indicator.
The accelerator pedal pointer is within the
CHARGE range.
Efficient energy recovery:
▷ The accelerator pedal moves to the left within
the blue range of the CHARGE display, ar‐
row 1.
▷ The energy use while driving can be opti‐
mized by efficient acceleration.
Efficient acceleration:
▷ The accelerator pedal moves to the right
within the blue range of the eDRIVE display,
arrow 2.
▷ Use deceleration during coasting as often as
possible for energy recovery.
Using driving modes and assistance
systems
Max eDRIVE
Max eDRIVE, refer to page 103, forces electric
driving. Electric driving is especially efficient for
short distances, low to medium speeds and in
stop-and-go traffic.
Maintaining charge state
The function, refer to page 102, conserves the
electric range for a later point in time. In this
case, the vehicle is driven primarily by the com‐
bustion engine.
ECO PRO
ECO PRO, refer to page 194, supports a driving
style that saves on fuel consumption. For this
purpose, the engine control and comfort fea‐
tures, for instance the climate control output, are
adjusted.
Discharge of the high-voltage battery
General information
Longer idle periods, refer to page 242, can re‐
duce the charge state of the high-voltage bat‐
tery.
Safety information
NOTICE
The high-voltage battery can be damaged by
excessive discharge. There is a risk of damage
to property. Before storing the vehicle for an
extended period, ensure that the high-voltage
battery is fully charged. During the idle period,
connect the vehicle to a charging station at a
compatible charging location. If necessary, the
high-voltage battery will be charged automati‐
cally. Make sure that the charging process
takes place. Regularly check the charge state.
Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for longer
than four weeks with a charge state below ap‐
prox. 80 %.
Seite 187
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
Safety information
WARNING
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehicle and
can endanger occupants and other traffic par‐
ticipants or damage the vehicle in the event of
an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In
addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's in‐
terior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.
Driving with the tailgate open
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Drive moderately.
Hot exhaust gas system
WARNING
During driving operation, high temperatures can
occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance
caused by the exhaust gas system. If combusti‐
ble materials, such as leaves or grass, come in
contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas sys‐
tem, these materials can ignite. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not
remove the heat shields installed and never ap‐
ply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact with
hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or
during parking. Do not touch the hot exhaust
gas system.
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle
WARNING
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can in‐
fluence one another. There is radiation due to
the transmission operations of mobile phones.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. If possible, in the car's interior use
only mobile phones with direct connections to
an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual
interference and deflect the radiation from the
car's interior.
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning.
It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of
contact between the tires and the road surface,
ultimately undermining your ability to steer and
brake the vehicle.
Driving through water
General information
When driving through water, follow the following:
▷ Drive through calm water only.
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
than maximum 9.8 in/25 cm.
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
NOTE
When driving too quickly through too deep wa‐
ter, water can enter into the engine compart‐
ment, the electrical system or the transmission.
There is a risk of damage to property. When
driving through water, do not exceed the maxi‐
Seite 188
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
mum indicated water level and the maximum
speed for driving through water.
Braking safely
General information
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that re‐
quire such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any
obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the
hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active
mode.
In certain braking situations, the perforated brake
discs can emit functional noises. Functional
noises have no effect on the performance and
operational reliability of the brake.
Objects in the movement area around
pedals and floor area
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐
not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gen‐
tly press the brake pedal every few miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger other
traffic.
The heat generated during braking dries brake
discs and brake pads and protects them against
corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
when you need it.
Hills
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear
that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the
brakes may overheat and reduce brake effi‐
ciency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
needed.
On downhill sections, use energy recovery if
possible to decelerate the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brakes wearing out and
possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of an
accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the
brake system.
WARNING
In idle state, in the ECO PRO driving mode or
with drive-ready state switched off, safety-rele‐
vant functions, for instance engine braking ef‐
fect, braking force boost, and steering assis‐
tance, are restricted or not available at all.
There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive in
idle state, in the ECO PRO driving mode or with
drive-ready state switched off.
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
on the brake pads are increased by the following
circumstances:
Seite 189
Things to remember when driving
DRIVING TIPS
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a
pulsating effect on the brakes in their response -
generally this cannot be corrected.
Condensation water under the parked
vehicle
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops and collects under‐
neath the vehicle.
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This
wear is not covered by the warranty. The vehicle
is not designed for use in motor sports competi‐
tion.
Seite 190
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Loading
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Safety information
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐
age them internally and cause a sudden drop in
tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics
may be negatively impacted, reducing lane sta‐
bility, lengthening the braking distances and
changing the steering response. There is a risk
of an accident. Pay attention to the permitted
load capacity of the tires and never exceed the
permitted gross weight.
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.
NOTE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1.
Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐
hicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
Seite 191
Loading
DRIVING TIPS
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐
hicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: do not exceed the maximum
load of the cargo area floor. The maximum
load capacity is 61 lbs / 28 kg. Stow the cargo
as far to the front as possible and below in
the cargo area.
Seite 192
DRIVING TIPS
Loading
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Increasing the range
General information
The vehicle contains comprehensive technolo‐
gies for reducing the energy consumption and
for maximizing the range.
The range depends on a number of different fac‐
tors.
The implementation of certain measures, driving
style and regular maintenance can increasing the
range and thereby also reduce the environmental
impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove attached parts
following use
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerody‐
namics and increase the energy consumption.
Closing the windows
Open windows increase air resistance and there‐
fore reduce the range.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect energy consumption in various
ways, for instance energy consumption can be
influenced by tire size.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before start‐
ing on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises energy consumption
and tire wear.
Stationary climate control
Run advance climate control, refer to page 174,
in the vehicle during charging before driving off.
Heating and cooling operations are very energy
intensive and substantially reduce the electric
range.
Look well ahead when driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead of you.
Longer braking procedures result in more effi‐
cient charging of the high-voltage battery via en‐
ergy recovery from braking.
Use coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.
Seite 193
Increasing the range
DRIVING TIPS
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Switch off any functions that are
not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐
dow defroster require a lot of energy and reduce
the range, especially in city and stop-and-go traf‐
fic.
Switch off these functions if they are not needed.
The ECO PRO driving mode supports the en‐
ergy conserving use of comfort features. These
functions are automatically deactivated partially
or completely.
Have maintenance carried out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW
recommends that maintenance work be per‐
formed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 230.
ECO PRO
Concept
ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on
fuel consumption. For this purpose, the engine
control and comfort features, for instance the cli‐
mate control output, are adjusted.
Under certain conditions the engine is automati‐
cally decoupled from the transmission in the
D selector lever position and the engine is
switched off. The D selector lever position re‐
mains engaged.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are dis‐
played to assist with an optimized fuel consump‐
tion driving style.
General information
ECO PRO
▷ Reduction of the heating output and switch-
on duration for exterior mirror, rear window,
and seat heating.
▷ Reduction of the cooling or heating output of
the air conditioner.
Activating ECO PRO
Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
1.
Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
3. Select the desired setting.
Via iDrive
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure ECO PRO"
5. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Activating/deactivating the functions
The following functions can be activated/deacti‐
vated:
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning"
▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.
ECO PRO limit
▷ Activate the ECO PRO limit:
"ECO PRO speed warning":
Seite 194
DRIVING TIPS
Increasing the range
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of
the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
▷ Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed:
"Tip at:"
Select the desired speed.
ECO PRO climate control
"ECO PRO climate control"
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
That is, it is possible to deviate slightly from the
set temperature or to heat or cool the car's inte‐
rior more slowly, to economize on fuel consump‐
tion.
In addition, the power output to the seat and mir‐
ror heating is reduced.
ECO PRO potential savings
Shows potential savings with the current settings
in percentages.
Display in the instrument cluster
ECO PRO efficiency display
A mark in the performance display informs about
the current driving style.
Mark in the CHARGE range, arrow 1: indication
for energy recovery and braking.
Mark in the ePOWER area, arrow 2: display when
accelerating.
Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the
bar's color:
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long as
the mark moves within the blue range.
▷ Gray display: modify driving style, for instance
by reduced acceleration.
The display turns blue as soon as all conditions
for driving with optimized fuel efficiency are met.
ECO PRO Tip
Driving tip
As soon as one of the conditions for efficient
driving is no longer fulfilled, respective driving
tips are displayed as a symbol in the instrument
cluster.
Symbols
An additional symbol and a SMS text message
are displayed on the control display.
Symbol Measure
For efficient driving back off the accel‐
erator or delay accelerating to allow
time to assess road conditions.
Reduce speed to the selected ECO
PRO speed.
Indications on the Control Display
General information
Information on fuel consumption and technology
can be displayed while driving.
eDRIVE
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"
Seite 195
Increasing the range
DRIVING TIPS
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle ............................................................................... 198
Refueling ................................................................................................... 207
Fuel ............................................................................................................ 210
Wheels and tires ...................................................................................... 212
Engine oil .................................................................................................. 224
Coolant ...................................................................................................... 229
Maintenance ............................................................................................. 230
Replacing components .......................................................................... 232
Breakdown assistance ........................................................................... 235
Care ........................................................................................................... 239
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Charging the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Concept
The vehicle can be charged using various charg‐
ing cables at charging stations or household
sockets. Control and monitoring of the charging
process are handled completely automatically.
The charge current strength can be set via
iDrive.
General information
High-voltage battery
The high-voltage battery is used as an energy
accumulator. The high-voltage battery can be
charged by energy recovery during the trip or via
the power grid.
In order to operate the high-voltage battery opti‐
mally, charge the vehicle regularly and com‐
pletely on a compatible charger.
When charging via the power grid, you can chose
between the following variants.
▷ Level 1 charging via a household socket.
▷ Level 2 charging via a Level 2 charging sta‐
tion.
Level 1 charging is possible via a household
socket with a voltage of 120 volts.
For optimal use of the energy from the power
grid, charging at a Level 2 charging station, such
as BMW i Wallbox, is recommended.
Charge current
General information
The charge current strength is indicated in am‐
peres.
The vehicle cannot automatically detect the max‐
imum permissible charge current strength of the
power grid during charging via a household
socket or charging station.
Level 1 charging
Prior to the first Level 1 charging at your own
household socket, as well as when charging at
external electrical power sockets in Level 1, the
allowed charge current strength must be deter‐
mined, for instance by a qualified electrician.
The charge current strength for Level 1 charg‐
ing, refer to page 204, can be adjusted in the ve‐
hicle in three levels.
At delivery, the charge current for Level 1 charg‐
ing is set to the lowest level.
Depending on the country-specific version, one
of several ampere ratings is printed on the
Level 1 charging cable. This ampere rating is the
limit which must be adhered to for the vehicle if
the charge current is set to the highest level. De‐
pending on the charging cable, the charge cur‐
rent strength may vary when lower levels are set.
Seite 198
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Overview
Imprint on the charging cable Charge current setting
"Max." "Reduced" "Low"
8 A 8 A 6 A 6 A
10 A 10 A 7.5 A 6 A
12 A 12 A 9 A 6 A
15 A 15 A 11.25 A 7.5 A
Depending on the charge current, the charging
duration changes.
Maintaining charge state
The current charge state of the high-voltage bat‐
tery can be maintained or increased with the
Maintain charge state, refer to page 102, func‐
tion. The charge state is maintained and the
electric range is conserved for a later point in the
trip.
Safety information
WARNING
Improper working with electrical current can
lead to an electric shock due to high voltages or
high currents. There is a risk of fire or danger to
life. Observe the general safety regulations
when working with electrical current.
WARNING
A faulty and incorrectly designed charging de‐
vice at the charging location can cause damage
to the vehicle and overload the power mains at
the charging location. There is a risk of fire and
a risk of injury.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that, prior to your first use of a charging loca‐
tion, you have the compatibility of the following
components confirmed:
▷ Charging cable.
▷ Charging station.
▷ Household socket and connected circuits.
WARNING
Damaged or worn charging devices, for in‐
stance worn contacts, can heat up. There is a
risk of fire. Only use charging devices in proper
state.
WARNING
If a sufficient safety distance from easily flam‐
mable materials is not maintained, simultane‐
ous charging and filling with fuel can cause a
risk of fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Do not fill the vehicle with
fuel and charge it simultaneously.
WARNING
Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. High voltage is applied at the
charging connection. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life.
Seite 199
Charging the vehicle
MOBILITY
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that work on the charging connection, for in‐
stance cleaning, be performed only by an au‐
thorized BMW i dealer's service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Charging cable
General information
Use a Level 1 charging cable, Level 2 charging
cable or the permanently installed charging cable
of a charging station to charge the vehicle.
Different charging cables can be required de‐
pending on the country.
Safety information
WARNING
Non-compatible charging cables or unsuitable
charging stations can heat up and cause dam‐
age to the vehicle. There is a risk of fire. Use
charging cables or charging stations for charg‐
ing that are suitable for the respective vehicle
type.
A dealer's service center will be glad to provide
information about suitable charging cables.
WARNING
Improper use of the charging cable can prevent
charging and lead to damage, for instance ca‐
ble fire. There is a risk of fire. Use the charging
cable only for charging the vehicle, and do not
extend it using cables or adapters.
WARNING
Damaged charging cables can heat up or lead
to an electric shock. There is a risk of fire or a
risk of injury. Use undamaged charging cables
only.
Level 1 charging cable
The vehicle is supplied with a Level 1 charging
cable.
With the Level 1 charging cable, it is permissible
to perform charging from grounded household
sockets. At the power connection of a household
socket, charging is done with alternating current.
When a Level 1 charging cable is used, this may
produce efficiency values other than indicated on
the energy label.
Level 2 charging cable
The Level 2 charging cable makes it possible to
quickly recharge at sockets of designated
Level 2 charging stations using a special plug.
Charging is performed with alternating current at
designated Level 2 charging stations. The charg‐
ing process can be completed faster than at
household sockets.
If necessary, the charging cable is attached to
the charging station.
Storage
The Level 1 charging cable is located in the sep‐
arate area on the right-hand side of the cargo
area.
The Level 2 charging cable can be stored in the
same place.
If required, store the charging cable with the in‐
stalled plug cover to prevent moisture in the
charging cable plug.
Seite 200
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Connecting
Connecting the charging cable
To connect, engage selector lever position P,
deactivate drive-ready state, and unlock the vehi‐
cle. Set the parking brake, if needed.
1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow.
2. Remove cover of the charging cable plug, if
needed.
3. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or Level 2 charging cable
to the port on the charging station.
4. Insert the charging cable plug corresponding
to the charging socket, and push it in until it
engages.
When charging at a charging station, follow the
instructions at the charging station.
Remove
When the charging process is active and the ve‐
hicle is locked, the charging cable is locked. Un‐
lock the vehicle before removing the cable.
When the charging process is completed, the
charging cable is automatically unlocked.
If necessary, clean the area between charging
socket flap and charging socket, for instance
from snow, before removing it.
1.
Unlock the vehicle by remote control if it is
locked.
Charging cable is unlocked.
2. Press the release button on the handle, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the charging cable at the
gripping areas.
Charging process is interrupted.
3. Remove the charging cable from the charg‐
ing socket, arrow 2.
4. Close the charging socket flap.
5. Attach cover of the charging cable plug, if
needed.
6. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from the
household socket or Level 2 charging cable
from the port on the charging station as
needed.
7. Stow the charging cable.
At a charging station, insert the permanently
installed charging cable in the place provided
for it.
Always keep charging socket clean and un‐
obstructed.
Keep the charging socket flap closed when
the charging socket is not used.
Manual release
Manually unlocking the charging
cable
In case of an electrical malfunction, the charging
cable can be manually unlocked.
When charging at a charging station, complete
the charging process at the charging station be‐
fore unlocking the charging cable.
1.
Open door on the side of the charging socket
flap.
2. Open cover, arrow 1.
Seite 201
Charging the vehicle
MOBILITY
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Pull the knob, arrow 2.
Charging cable is manually unlocked.
3. Removing the charging cable, refer to
page 201.
Have the locking system of the charging socket
checked at the dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop after
manual unlocking of the charging cable.
Charging process
Safety information
WARNING
Improper use of the power mains connection
can lead to damage, for instance cable fire.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Use the charging cable only for charg‐
ing the vehicle, and do not extend it using ca‐
bles or adapters.
WARNING
If the charge current strength is adjusted incor‐
rectly, the power mains of the household
socket can be overloaded and overheat. There
is a risk of fire. Adjust the charge current
strength to the power mains prior to charging
on household sockets. With unknown power
networks, set on the lowest level.
Starting the charging process
1. Engage selector lever position P. Set the
parking brake, if needed.
2. Planning the charging process, refer to
page 203.
3. Switch off drive-ready state.
4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or Level 2 charging cable
to the port on the charging station.
5. Open charging socket flap.
6. Connect charging cable to the vehicle, refer
to page 201.
7. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
At high temperatures, the high-voltage battery is
initially cooled. There may be a delay before
charging starts. If the high-voltage battery is dis‐
charged, cooling of the high-voltage battery may
not be possible. The charging process cannot be
started.
If the Level 1 charging cable is exposed to high
temperatures and direct sunlight, this may inter‐
rupt the charging process. Charging resumes au‐
tomatically.
The charging process may take longer under ex‐
tremely low or high temperatures.
Display of the charging status
Indicator light on the charging socket
An indicator light is located on the charging
socket.
Seite 202
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Charging status
Light Charging status
White Charging cable can be con‐
nected or removed.
Flashes yel‐
low
Charging process is being pre‐
pared.
Blue The charging process starts at
the set time.
Flashes blue Charging process is active.
Flashes red Fault in the charging process.
Green Charging process is completed.
When the vehicle is locked, the indicator light
goes out after some time.
When the vehicle is unlocked, the blue indicator
light flashes continuously. The other indicator
lights go out after some time.
Press the button of the remote control to
check the charging status. The charging status is
indicated on the indicator light. In some cases
the vehicle is locked.
Additional messages about the charging status
can be displayed in the instrument cluster, on the
BMW display key, or via the BMW Con‐
nected app on a smartphone.
Planning the charging process
General information
The charging process can be adapted to con‐
straints, for instance the cost of electricity. The
vehicle can control the charging process in such
a way that the charging process is completed at
the departure time. A departure time must be set
for this purpose, refer to page 205.
The following settings are available:
▷ Immediate charging.
▷ Set time window for favorable charging.
▷ Set charging via a Level 1 charging cable.
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can
be made via iDrive. Departure time can only be
changed once. Scheduled departure times are
not adjusted. Settings for stationary climate con‐
trol and charging process are also accepted for
planned departure times.
Immediate charging
The charging process starts as soon as the
charging cable is connected.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Charge immediately"
Setting time window for favorable
charging
When departure time is set, a time window for
charging with a favorable electricity rate can be
set via iDrive.
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Charge for departure time"
4. "Set low cost time slot"
5. Set rate begin.
6. Set rate end.
The Digital Charging Service enables the time
window to be set automatically for certain loca‐
tions. Further information about the Digital
Charging Service is available on the Internet:
https://charging.bmwgroup.com
The vehicle can also start the charging process
before the selected time window begins or end it
after the selected time window finishes. The
starting point of the charging process is adjusted
so the vehicle can be fully charged and, if appli‐
cable, its climate controlled right up to the depar‐
ture time.
Seite 203
Charging the vehicle
MOBILITY
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Setting the charge current for charging
via a Level 1 charging cable
Depending on the electrical mains, the vehicle
must be charged with a different charging cur‐
rent strength, refer to page 198.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Settings charging current"
Settings are stored. When you change charging
locations you also might need to change the set‐
ting for charging.
Set the charge current strength at other house‐
hold sockets to the lowest level.
Stopping the charging process
The charging process can be stopped at any
time by removing the charging cable and contin‐
ued at a later time by connecting the charging
cable. This enables, for instance the use of other
loads on the power connection or prevents si‐
multaneous high power from multiple loads.
Removing the charging cable, refer to page 201.
Continuing the charging process
If the charging process is interrupted, for in‐
stance through a temporary power failure, the
charging process is automatically continued after
the interruption.
Terminating the charging process
1.
Removing the charging cable from the vehi‐
cle, refer to page 201.
2. Stow the charging cable as required.
3. Close the charging socket flap.
4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
The charge state indicator light shows the
charge state of the high-voltage battery in the in‐
strument cluster, if standby state is switched on.
If all bars are filled, the high-voltage battery is
fully charged.
Even if no bars are filled, the high-voltage system
is still under high voltage.
Information regarding the charging process are
shown on the charging screen.
Display Meaning
Blue plug: charging process active or
completed.
White plug: charging process inter‐
rupted.
Running light: animated with active
charging process.
End of charging time or set departure
time.
Charging progress bar.
Indicator in blue: charged electrical
range.
Indicator in white: maximum electrical
range.
White clock: departure time set.
Blue plug: charging process active or
completed.
White plug: charging process inter‐
rupted.
Climate control activated at departure
time.
Seite 204
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Display Meaning
Flashing: ventilation active.
Flashing: heating active.
Flashing: cooling active.
Departure time
Concept
For optimum range and climate control, the de‐
parture time can be set before parking the vehi‐
cle.
General information
With a set departure time, the vehicle is pre-
heated or pre-cooled during the charging proc‐
ess if climate control is set. Climate control out‐
put is reduced during the trip. This increases the
range during electric driving.
The following settings are possible at departure
time:
▷ Climate control at departure time.
▷ Planning a one-time departure time.
▷ Planning of up to three regular departure
times per day of the week.
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes can
be made via iDrive. Departure time can only be
changed once. Scheduled departure times are
not adjusted. Settings for climate control and
charging process are also applied for scheduled
departure times.
Climate control at departure time
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Precondition for departure"
Setting the departure time
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Set departure time"
4. Set the desired days of the week, if needed.
5. Set the desired time.
Up to three departure times can be set.
Activating the departure time
Via iDrive:
1.
"My Vehicle"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Set departure time"
Set departure times are displayed.
4. For example activate "Departure time 1".
Up to three departure times can be activated.
The set departure time will be deactivated, if the
departure time was ignored three times in a row.
Climate control
General information
The following settings for climate control of the
vehicle are possible:
▷ Activate stationary climate control immedi‐
ately, refer to page 174.
With stationary climate control activated and
no charging cable connected, the range is re‐
duced.
▷ Planned climate control at the set departure
time, refer to page 175.
If a Mode 2 charging cable is used, the high-
voltage battery may not be fully charged at
departure time.
Seite 205
Charging the vehicle
MOBILITY
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Discharged high-voltage and
vehicle battery
General information
In addition to the high-voltage battery, the vehi‐
cle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which is re‐
quired for operation of the onboard electronics.
If the high-voltage battery and the vehicle battery
are discharged, it is not possible to operate the
vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked and returned to opera‐
tion by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Seite 206
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Refueling
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 210, prior to refueling.
To also ensure all engine functions under unfav‐
orable conditions, for instance steep vehicle incli‐
nations, at least 3 US gal/10 liters fuel should be
refueled.
Do not refuel unless the engine is at a standstill
and the selector lever is in position P/N, other‐
wise the buildup of pressure may cause the fuel
nozzle to shut off prematurely.
Safety information
NOTE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.
WARNING
If a sufficient safety distance from easily flam‐
mable materials is not maintained, simultane‐
ous charging and filling with fuel can cause a
risk of fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Do not fill the vehicle with
fuel and charge it simultaneously.
Tank vent
Concept
The vehicle is equipped with a special fuel tank.
The fuel tank is designed for special require‐
ments that arise from hybrid operation of the ve‐
hicle, i.e., alternating drive with combustion en‐
gine or electric motor.
General information
In the fuel tank, excess pressure can build up
due to gasoline vapors which are dissipated be‐
fore the fuel cap is opened.
Overview
The button is located on the driver's side on the
door armrest.
Tank venting
1.
Switch off drive-ready state.
2. Press button to start the pressure
equalization.
The status of the tank venting is displayed in
the instrument cluster. In rare cases, the tank
venting can last several minutes.
Seite 207
Refueling
MOBILITY
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
If the tank venting has been completed, a
message is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter. The fuel filler flap is released for opening.
3. Open the fuel filler flap.
If it is not possible to open the fuel filler flap
after tank venting, press the button again.
If it is still not possible to open the fuel filler
flap even after the button has been pressed,
unlock the fuel filler flap manually, refer to
page 208.
Fuel cap
Opening
Before opening, vent the tank.
1.
Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jam‐
med and crushed during closing. The cap can‐
not be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can
escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Pay attention that the retaining
strap is not jammed or crushed when closing
the cap.
1.
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Seite 208
MOBILITY
Refueling
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
The release is located in the cargo area.
1. Open the cover on the right side trim.
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump sym‐
bol. This releases the fuel filler flap.
3. Open the fuel filler flap.
4. Carefully open the fuel cap. Excess pressure
can build up in the fuel tank from gasoline va‐
por.
5. Fuel the vehicle as usual. The residue pres‐
sure in the tank may make refueling difficult,
for instance the fuel pump nozzle may shut
off frequently.
Follow the following when
refueling
General information
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely
into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle
during refueling causes:
▷ Premature switching off.
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly af‐
ter refueling, otherwise the emissions warning
light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐
tion.
Safety information
WARNING
If a sufficient safety distance from easily flam‐
mable materials is not maintained, simultane‐
ous charging and filling with fuel can cause a
risk of fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Do not fill the vehicle with
fuel and charge it simultaneously.
NOTE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the
fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted
surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel.
Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There
is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.
Seite 209
Refueling
MOBILITY
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Fuel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Fuel recommendation
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations sell
fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in win‐
ter, for instance helps make a cold start easier.
Gasoline
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %,
i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐
dards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
Safety information
NOTE
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the cata‐
lytic converter is permanently damaged. There
is a risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or
add the following in the case of gasoline en‐
gines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese
or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
NOTE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and
the engine. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage
of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel
with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to
M100.
NOTE
Fuel that does not comply with the minimum
quality can compromise engine function or
cause engine damage. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not fill with fuel that does
not comply with the minimum quality.
Seite 210
MOBILITY
Fuel
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and
stalling, especially under certain environmental
conditions such as high ambient temperature
and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
nance.
Recommended fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 93.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 91.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating,
the engine may produce knocking sounds when
starting at high external temperatures. This has
no effect on the engine life.
Seite 211
Fuel
MOBILITY
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Tire inflation pressure
General information
The tire inflation pressure and tire characteristics
influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety.
▷ Driving comfort.
▷ Driving dynamics.
▷ Fuel consumption.
Safety information
WARNING
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure
may heat up significantly and sustain damage.
This will have a negative impact on aspects of
handling, such as steering and braking re‐
sponse. There is a risk of an accident. Regularly
check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it
as needed, for instance twice a month and be‐
fore a long trip.
Tire inflation pressure specifications
In the tire inflation pressure table
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 213, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure
values apply to tire sizes approved by the manu‐
facturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
General information
Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
pressure increases with the tire temperature.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure.
The displays of inflation devices may under-read
by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Checking using tire inflation pressure
specifications in the tire inflation pressure
table
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold
tires or tires at the same temperature as the am‐
bient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when
the tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not
been exceeded.
Seite 212
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least
2 hours after a trip.
1. Determine, refer to page 212, the intended
tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted
tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐
rent tire inflation pressure value deviates from
the specified value.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed
onto the tire valves.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Tire inflation pressures up to
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐
ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 213, and adjust as necessary.
These pressure values can also be found on the
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door
pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Tire inflation pressure values up to
100 mph/160 km/h
i8 Coupe
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
215/45 R 20 95
V M+S XL Std
2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
Front: 195/50 R
20 93 W XL Std
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 215/45 R
20 95 W XL Std
- 2.2 / 32
Front: 215/45 R
20 95 W XL Std
2.2 / 32 -
Rear: 245/40 R
20 99 W XL Std
- 2.2 / 32
Tire inflation pressures at max.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess
of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if
necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds ex‐
ceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant
table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire
damage and accidents could occur.
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for opti‐
mum driving comfort, note the pressure values in
the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 214, and adjust as necessary.
Seite 213
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Tire inflation pressure values over
100 mph/160 km/h
i8 Coupe
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
tires
215/45 R 20 95
V M+S XL Std
2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
Front: 195/50 R
20 93 W XL Std
2.5 / 36 -
Rear: 215/45 R
20 95 W XL Std
- 3.0 / 44
Front: 215/45 R
20 95 W XL Std
2.3 / 33 -
Rear: 245/40 R
20 99 W XL Std
- 2.8 / 41
Tire identification marks
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall
and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on
the certification label on the driver’s door pillar.
Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater
than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight
Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and
tire loads, respectively.
Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R = up to 106 mph/170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0118
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
0118: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least
every 6 years.
Manufacture date
You can find the manufacture date of the tire on
the tire's sidewall.
Designation Manufacture date
DOT … 0118 1st week, 2018
Seite 214
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature
A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Fed‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfa‐
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
planing, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces‐
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perform‐
ance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in com‐
bination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
risk of hydroplaning.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
winter operation.
Seite 215
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
circumference and have the legally required min‐
imum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm.
The positions of the wear indicators are marked
on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indica‐
tor.
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as
well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐
file tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire inflation pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure,
which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There
is a risk of an accident. If tire damage is sus‐
pected while driving, immediately reduce speed
and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For
this purpose, drive carefully to the nearest deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or
transported as needed. Do not repair damaged
tires, but have them replaced.
WARNING
Tires can become damaged by driving over ob‐
stacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high
speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-
section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the
higher the risk of tire damage. There is a dan‐
ger of accidents and property damage. If possi‐
ble, drive around obstacles, or drive over them
slowly and carefully.
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
Seite 216
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your
vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for in‐
stance due to contact with the body due to tol‐
erances despite the same official size rating.
There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐
turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you
use wheels and tires that have been recom‐
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your
vehicle type.
WARNING
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a
negative impact on the vehicle's handling and
on the function of a variety of systems, such as
ABS or DSC. There is a risk of an accident. To
maintain good handling and vehicle response,
use only tires with a single tread configuration
from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer
of the vehicle recommends that you use
wheels and tires that have been recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle
type. Following tire damage, have the original
wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehi‐
cle as soon as possible.
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐
cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
brands can be identified by a star on the tire
sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire casing
structures. With advanced age the service life
can be limited. There is a risk of an accident.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide
better winter traction than summer tires, they
usually do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
Seite 217
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a label showing the permissible maxi‐
mum speed in the field of view. The label is avail‐
able from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not
exceed the permissible maximum speed.
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be‐
tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further in‐
formation is available from a dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and
correct, if needed.
Rotating the tires between the axes is not per‐
missible on vehicles with different tire sizes or
rim sizes on the front and rear axles.
Storing tires
Air pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
place.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease, and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from
passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
are in the straight-ahead position and engage
the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
hind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Snow chains
Safety information
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on unsuita‐
ble tires, the snow chains can come into con‐
tact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of acci‐
dents or risk of damage to property. Only
mount snow chains on tires that are designated
by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
snow chains.
WARNING
Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage
tires and vehicle components. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the snow chains are always suffi‐
ciently tight. Re-tighten as needed according to
the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.
Seite 218
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Fine-link snow chains
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 215/45 R 20.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM af‐
ter mounting snow chains, as doing so may re‐
sult in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, activate the
Sport program with the selector lever. This en‐
sures that the rear wheels are being powered.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if needed.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when
using snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When a flat tire kit is used, an immediate wheel
change when there is a loss of tire inflation pres‐
sure in the event of a flat tire is not always neces‐
sary.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Safety information
DANGER
The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term
lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if
all safety measures are observed, there is a risk
of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack
tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
vehicle and do not start the engine.
DANGER
Supports such as wooden blocks under the ve‐
hicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle
jack to bear weight. They have the potential to
exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, caus‐
ing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place
supports under the vehicle jack.
WARNING
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is
provided in order to perform a wheel change in
the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐
signed for frequent use; for example, changing
from summer to winter tires. Using the jack fre‐
quently may cause it to become jammed or
damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. Only use the jack to attach
an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a
breakdown.
WARNING
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example
snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip
away. There is a risk of injury. If possible,
change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re‐
sistant surface.
Seite 219
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehi‐
cle and for the jacking points on the vehicle
only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any
other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.
WARNING
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking
point provided for this purpose, the vehicle may
be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when
it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. When cranking up
the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the
jacking point next to the wheel housing.
WARNING
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall
off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. While the vehicle is raised, do not ex‐
ert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly
on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
WARNING
Incorrect handling of the vehicle jack can dam‐
age the vehicle's underbody and expose high-
voltage components. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. When cranking up
the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the
jacking point next to the wheel housing. Make
sure not to damage any of the underbody pan‐
eling parts.
Securing the vehicle against rolling
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐
tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away
when changing a wheel.
On a level surface
Place chocks or other suitable objects, for exam‐
ple a rock, in front of and behind the wheel that is
diagonally opposite to the wheel that you wish to
change.
On a slight downhill gradient
If you need to change a wheel on a slight down‐
hill grade, place chocks and other suitable ob‐
jects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of
both the front and rear axles against the rolling
direction.
Seite 220
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Lug bolt lock
Concept
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
which matches the coding.
Overview
The adapter for the lug bolt lock is stored behind
the left side trim in the cargo area.
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug
bolt.
Screwing on
1.
Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐
sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug
bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque
is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screw‐
ing on the lug bolt.
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground
at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have
all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the im‐
mediate area in a safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get
wheel change tools and, if necessary, the
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or port‐
able hazard warning light at an appropriate
distance.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the indicated positions.
Seite 221
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Jacking up the vehicle
WARNING
Hands and fingers can be jammed when using
the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Com‐
ply with the described hand position and do not
change this position while using the vehicle
jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1,
and grasp the vehicle jack crank with your
other hand, arrow 2.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular re‐
cess of the jacking point closest to the wheel
to be changed.
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle
jack crank or lever clockwise.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as
soon as the vehicle jack is under load and
continue turning the vehicle jack crank or
lever with one hand.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and at a right angle beneath the
jacking point.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.
7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire sur‐
face of the jack is in contact with the ground
and the wheel in question is raised a maxi‐
mum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the ground.
Seite 222
MOBILITY
Wheels and tires
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a cross‐
wise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle
manufacturer are mounted, the accompany‐
ing lug bolts may have to be used as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐
tern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise
to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehi‐
cle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely.
After the wheel change
1.
Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tighten‐
ing torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area,
if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored un‐
der the cargo floor panel because of its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the near‐
est dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Seite 223
Wheels and tires
MOBILITY
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
your driving style and driving conditions. When a
sporty driving style is used, the engine oil con‐
sumption, for instance is clearly higher.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level af‐
ter refueling by taking a detailed measurement.
The engine oil consumption can increase in the
following situations, for example:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classified
as not suitable.
Different Check Control messages appear on the
Control Display depending on the engine oil
level.
Safety information
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Electronic oil measurement
General information
The electronic oil measurement has two measur‐
ing principles:
▷ Monitoring.
▷ Detailed measurement.
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, for instance when
taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a
detailed measurement.
Monitoring
Concept
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
while driving and can be shown on the Control
Display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
A red indicator light indicates that the en‐
gine oil pressure is too low.
Seite 224
MOBILITY
Engine oil
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Functional requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving with the com‐
bustion engine running.
Displaying the engine oil level
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
System limits
When making frequent short-distance trips or
using a dynamic driving style, it may not be pos‐
sible to calculate a measured value. In this case,
the measured value for the last, sufficiently long
trip is displayed.
Detailed measurement
Concept
The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle
is stationary and displayed via a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
General information
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
Functional requirements
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Drive-ready state is established.
▷ Selector lever position N engaged and accel‐
erator pedal not depressed.
▷ The combustion engine is at operating tem‐
perature.
Performing a detailed measurement
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Measure engine oil level"
5. "Start measurement"
The engine oil level is checked and displayed via
a scale.
Engine compartment access
General information
The engine compartment is located under the
tailgate.
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine com‐
partment can damage vehicle components and
impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of per‐
sonal and property damage. The manufacturer
of your vehicle recommends that, in the effort
to avoid such risks, work in the engine com‐
partment be performed by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
WARNING
The engine compartment accommodates mov‐
ing components. Certain components in the
engine compartment can also move with the
vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator
fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into
the area of moving parts. Keep articles of cloth‐
ing and hair away from moving parts.
Seite 225
Engine oil
MOBILITY
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Removing covers
1. Turn the twist locks by 90°, arrows 1, and re‐
move cargo cover, arrow 2.
2. Depending on the vehicle equipment, turn
the screws counterclockwise to undo them,
arrows 1, and remove the cover, arrow 2.
3. Remove insulation.
4. Turn screws counterclockwise to undo them
and remove engine compartment cover, ar‐
row.
To prevent the screws falling into the engine
compartment, do not place screws in the area
where the engine compartment is accessed.
Attaching the covers
1. Insert, arrows 1, press down, arrows 2, and
push in, arrow 3, engine compartment cover.
Turn screws clockwise to tighten.
2. Insert the insulation.
3. Depending on the vehicle equipment, guide
the thread through the opening provided.
Turn screws clockwise to tighten.
4. Insert the cargo cover and secure it with the
twist locks.
Adding engine oil
General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to
be added is indicated in the message displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to
page 227.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off standby
state before adding engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Safety information
WARNING
Operating materials, for instance oils, greases,
coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐
low the instructions on the containers. Avoid
the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes
Seite 226
MOBILITY
Engine oil
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
with operating materials. Do not refill operating
materials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
NOTE
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Overview
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 225.
Adding engine oil
1. Open the lid counterclockwise.
2. Add engine oil.
3. Close the cap.
Engine oil types to add
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Only add the types of engine oil which are listed.
Safety information
NOTE
Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not use oil addi‐
tives.
NOTE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in
the engine or damage it. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. When selecting an engine oil,
make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil
rating.
Suitable engine oil types
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating
standards:
Seite 227
Engine oil
MOBILITY
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Oil rating
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not
available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil
with the following oil rating can be added:
Oil rating
API SL.
API SM.
API SN.
Viscosity grades
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-20.
SAE 0W-30.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Engine oil change
NOTE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion
can cause increased engine wear and thus en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop change the en‐
gine oil.
Seite 228
MOBILITY
Engine oil
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Coolant level
Have a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop check the cool‐
ant level and add coolant, if needed.
Seite 229
Coolant
MOBILITY
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
BMW maintenance system
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
support in maintaining road safety and the opera‐
tional reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the main‐
tenance system may vary according to the coun‐
try version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels
and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated
separately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Safety information
DANGER
Improperly executed work, in particular mainte‐
nance and repair on the high-voltage system,
can lead to electric shock. There is a risk of in‐
jury, fire and danger to life.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that the work on the vehicle, in particular main‐
tenance and repair, be performed only by an
authorized BMW i dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Condition Based Service CBS
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into account
the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses
these to calculate the need for maintenance.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
General information
Information on service requirements, refer to
page 125, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is con‐
tinuously stored in the remote control. The deal‐
er’s service center can read this data out and
suggest a maintenance scope for the vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle battery
was disconnected are not taken into account.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance proce‐
dures, such as checking brake fluid and, if neces‐
sary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
activated-charcoal filter.
Seite 230
MOBILITY
Maintenance
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
additional information on service requirements.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop. Records of regular
maintenance and repair work should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis
General information
Devices connected at the OBD socket trigger
the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐
move any devices connected at the OBD socket
before locking the vehicle.
Safety information
NOTE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intri‐
cate component intended to be used in con‐
junction with specialized equipment to check
the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Im‐
proper use of the socket for Onboard Diagno‐
sis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Di‐
agnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the socket
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
board Diagnosis.
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
ously damage emission control components,
in particular the catalytic converter.
Seite 231
Maintenance
MOBILITY
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Wiper blades
Safety information
NOTE
The window may sustain damage if the wiper
falls onto it without the wiper blade installed.
There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the
wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do
not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper
blade installed.
Replacing the front wiper blades
1.
To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper
arms, refer to page 109.
2. Fold up the wipers.
3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal posi‐
tion.
4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of
removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
Lights and bulbs
General information
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution
to vehicle safety.
All headlights and lights are made using LED or
laser technology.
Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐
odes installed behind a cover as a light source.
These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐
ventional lasers and are officially designated as
Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you let a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop perform
the work in case of a malfunction.
Safety information
WARNING
Focused laser light can irritate or permanently
damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐
mends that the work on the lighting system in‐
Seite 232
MOBILITY
Replacing components
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
cluding bulb replacement be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
WARNING
Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the
retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not
look directly into the headlights or other light
sources. Do not remove the LED covers.
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When driv‐
ing with the lights switched on, the condensation
evaporates after a short time. The headlight
glass does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights switched on,
increasing humidity forms, for instance water
droplets in the light, have the headlights
checked.
Vehicle battery
The vehicle battery has 12 volts. The battery
supplies the onboard electronics with energy.
Information about the high-voltage system, refer
to page 198.
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Replacing the vehicle battery
General information
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop register
the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery
has been replaced. Once the battery has been
registered again, all comfort features will be avail‐
able without restriction and any Check Control
messages displayed which relate to comfort fea‐
tures will disappear.
Safety information
NOTE
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can
damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
functions. There is a risk of personal and prop‐
erty damage. Only vehicle batteries that are
compatible with your vehicle type should be in‐
stalled in your vehicle. Information on compati‐
ble vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’s
service center.
Charging the vehicle battery
General information
Charging a discharged battery, refer to page 206.
Safety information
NOTE
Non-compatible external chargers can damage
the vehicle. There is a risk of personal and
property damage. Only charging devices that
are compatible with your vehicle and that are
below the maximum charge voltage should be
used to charge your vehicle. Information on
compatible chargers is available at your dealer’s
service center.
Seite 233
Replacing components
MOBILITY
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to be
newly initialized or individual settings updated, for
example:
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or take
them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so that
it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Safety information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload elec‐
trical lines and components. There is a risk of
fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do
not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute
of another color or amperage rating.
Accessing the fuses
The fuses are located in the passenger floor area
under the dashboard.
1. To open, loosen screws, arrow 1.
2. Remove cover, arrow 2.
Proceed in the reverse order to install.
Information on the fuse types and locations, as
well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is
found on a separate sheet in the fuse box.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop replace the
fuses.
Seite 234
MOBILITY
Replacing components
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located in the center console.
The red light in the button flashes when the haz‐
ard warning flashers are activated.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in the bottom of
the cargo area.
Release the Velcro® fastener to remove it.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents regu‐
larly and replace any expired items promptly.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located behind the left-hand
cover in the cargo area.
To open, pull on the handle.
Emergency Request
Intelligent emergency call
Concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be triggered automatically by the sys‐
tem or manually.
Intelligent emergency call establishes a connec‐
tion with the BMW Response Center.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
Seite 235
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable condi‐
tions.
Overview
SOS button in the roofliner.
Functional requirements
▷ The Assist system is functional.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
emergency call: the SIM card integrated in
the vehicle has been activated.
Automatic triggering
Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐
bags trigger, an Emergency Request is automati‐
cally initiated immediately after an accident of
corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS but‐
ton.
Manual triggering
1.
Touch the cover.
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED
on the button illuminates green.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an Emer‐
gency Request has been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
Display, the Emergency Request can be
aborted.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until
the voice connection has been established.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to
the BMW Response Center has been estab‐
lished.
The BMW Response Center then makes
contact with you and takes further steps to
help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
Response Center can take further steps to
help you under certain circumstances.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW Re‐
sponse Center which serves to determine the
necessary rescue measures. E.g., the current
position of the vehicle, if it can be established.
Even if you can no longer hear the BMW Re‐
sponse Center through the loudspeakers, the
BMW Response Center may still be able to
hear you.
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐
gency Request.
Jump-starting
DANGER
Due to the high voltage of the drive system,
there is a risk of electric shock. There is danger
to life. Do not jump or directly charge the vehi‐
cle battery with conventional jump-starting.
Tow-starting and towing
Transporting the vehicle
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Seite 236
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Safety information
NOTE
The vehicle can be damaged when towing the
vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of
damage to property. The vehicle should only be
transported on a loading platform.
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the dan‐
ger area, push it for a short distance at a speed
of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h.
Roll or push, refer to page 112, the vehicle.
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
NOTE
The vehicle can become damaged when lifting
and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.
Towing other vehicles
The tow-starting or towing of other vehicles with
the BMW i8 is not possible.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried
in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front of
your vehicle.
The tow fitting is located behind the left cover in
the cargo area.
Use of the tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the ve‐
hicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for in‐
stance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fit‐
ting.
Seite 237
Breakdown assistance
MOBILITY
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Safety information
NOTE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there
may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fit‐
ting. There is a risk of damage to property. Fol‐
low the notes on using the tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
push it out.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the Steptronic transmission.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties cor‐
rected by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
What to do after an accident
Safety information
WARNING
Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
ger to life. After an accident, do not touch any
high-voltage components such as orange col‐
ored high-voltage cables or parts that are in
contact with exposed high-voltage cables.
WARNING
Fluids in the high-voltage battery are corrosive.
There is a risk of injury. Do not touch fluids es‐
caping from the high-voltage battery.
General information
After an accident, compliance with the following
safety precautions is required with regard to the
high-voltage system:
▷ Secure the crash site.
▷ Immediately notify rescue forces, police, or
firefighters of the fact that your vehicle is
equipped with a high-voltage system.
▷ Engage selector lever position P, set the
parking brake, and switch off the standby
state and drive-ready state.
▷ Lock the vehicle after exiting.
▷ Do not inhale any gases escaping from the
high-voltage battery; if needed, maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle.
Seite 238
MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Washing the vehicle
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects, for instance l
eaves, from the air outlet grills in the hood.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐
ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the
vehicle.
Steam blaster and high-pressure
washer
Safety information
NOTE
When washing, water can get into the open
charging socket. There is a risk of damage to
property. Close the charging socket flap while
washing.
WARNING
Contact with live components can lead to an
electric shock. High voltage is applied at the
charging connection. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that work on the charging connection, for in‐
stance cleaning, be performed only by an au‐
thorized BMW i dealer's service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
NOTE
When cleaning with high-pressure washers,
components can be damaged due to the pres‐
sure or temperatures being too high. There is a
risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient
distance and do not spray too long continu‐
ously. Follow the operating instructions for the
high-pressure washer.
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
▷ Minimum distance from the charging socket
flap: 31.5 in/80 cm.
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTE
Improper use of automatic vehicle washes can
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of
damage to property. Follow the following in‐
structions:
▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
Seite 239
Care
MOBILITY
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
tem.
Driving into a vehicle wash with a
Steptronic transmission
General information
In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to roll
freely.
Roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 112.
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock
the vehicle.
Driving out of a vehicle wash
Make sure that the remote control is in the vehi‐
cle.
Activate drive-ready state. Activate drive-ready
state, refer to page 100.
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
be reduced. The heat generated during braking
dries brake discs and brake pads and protects
them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the windows,
to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and
to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
using care and cleaning products for BMW i.
Suitable care products are available from a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
gerous and harmful to your health. There is a
risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open
the doors or windows. Only use products in‐
tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐
structions on the container.
Vehicle paint
General information
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect
the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and
extent of your vehicle care to these influences.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being altered
or discolored.
Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suitable for
vehicles with matte finish.
Seite 240
MOBILITY
Care
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe
in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear
and premature degradation of the leather sur‐
face.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
grease will gradually break down the protective
layer of the leather surface.
Upholstery material care
General information
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum
cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bever‐
age stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth
with a suitable cleaning agent.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐
terial vigorously.
Safety information
NOTE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of clothing
can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of
damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro®
fasteners are closed.
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do
not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets
above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can
destroy the protective layer of adjacent compo‐
nents, such as the brake disc.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radiator
grille or door handles with an ample supply of
water, possibly with shampoo added, particularly
when they have been exposed to road salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface soil‐
ing of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only
water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
or noises.
Plastic components
NOTE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such
as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease remov‐
ers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts.
There is a risk of damage to property. Clean
with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly
with water.
Plastic components are e.g.:
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
▷ Roofliner.
▷ Light lenses.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
Seite 241
Care
MOBILITY
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the car's interior.
▷ Carbon parts in the car's interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Safety belts
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt
webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety
belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the
safety belts.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
belts clipped into their buckles.
Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if
they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐
not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a mi‐
crofiber cloth and water or an upholstery cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐
gent.
Displays/Screens/protective glass of the
Head-up Display
NOTE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any
kind can damage the surface of displays and
screens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
NOTE
The surface of displays can be damaged with
improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to
property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do
not use any scratching materials.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
play using a microfiber cloth and commercially
available dish-washing soap.
Long idle times and long-term vehicle
storage
Concept
For idle phases that last several weeks, park the
vehicle with a fully charged battery if possible.
Do not park the vehicle for longer than 14 days if
the electric range is less than 6 mls, approx.
10 km.
With storage times of up to three months, if pos‐
sible plug the vehicle into a compatible power
source or park it in a nearly fully charged state.
Seite 242
MOBILITY
Care
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
General information
Your dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop can advise you on
what to consider when storing the vehicle for
longer than three months.
Follow the instructions for discharging the high-
voltage battery, refer to page 187.
Safety information
NOTICE
The high-voltage battery can be damaged by
excessive discharge. There is a risk of damage
to property. Before storing the vehicle for an
extended period, ensure that the high-voltage
battery is fully charged. During the idle period,
connect the vehicle to a charging station at a
compatible charging location. If necessary, the
high-voltage battery will be charged automati‐
cally. Make sure that the charging process
takes place. Regularly check the charge state.
Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for longer
than four weeks with a charge state below ap‐
prox. 80 %.
Seite 243
Care
MOBILITY
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
REFERENCE
Technical data .......................................................................................... 246
Appendix ................................................................................................... 248
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................ 250
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
General information
The technical data and specifications in this
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values.
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this,
for instance due to the selected special equip‐
ment, country version or country-specific meas‐
urement method. Detailed values can be found in
the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle
or can be obtained from a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-specific
measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for instance a roof antenna, roof
racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for in‐
stance due to the selected special equipment,
tires, load and chassis version.
BMW i8 Coupe
Width with mirrors Inches/mm 87.3/2,218
Width without mirrors Inches/mm 76.5/1,942
Height Inches/mm 50.8/1,291
Length Inches/mm 184.9/4,697
Wheelbase Inches/mm 110.2/2,800
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 40.4/12.3
Seite 246
REFERENCE
Technical data
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Weights
BMW i8 Coupe
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,233/1,920
Load lbs/kg 712/323
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,028/920
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,293/1,040
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 11.0/42.0 Fuel quality, refer to
page 210.
Seite 247
Technical data
REFERENCE
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehi‐
cle are listed here.
Updates made after the editorial deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual
contain updates made after the editorial dead‐
line:
▷ Climate control: automatic climate control.
Seite 248
REFERENCE
Appendix
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Seite 249
Appendix
REFERENCE
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS, Antilock Brake System 153
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 114
Accessories and parts 10
Acoustic pedestrian protection 103
AC quick charging cable, see Level 2 charging
cable 200
Activated-charcoal filter 173
Activating, drive-ready state 101
Adapting to the course of the road, hybrid sys‐
tem 120
Adaptive brake lights, see Brake force dis‐
play 152
Additives, engine oil types 227
Adjustments, steering wheel 94
Advance climate control, see Stationary climate
control 174
After washing vehicle 240
Airbags 139
Airbags, indicator and warning light 140
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 172
Air distribution, manual 172
Air flow, automatic climate control 172
Air pressure, tires 212
Air vents, see Ventilation 173
Alarm system 85
Alarm, unintentional 86
All-season tires, see Winter tires 217
Ambient light 138
Antifreeze, washer fluid 110
Antilock Brake System, ABS 153
Anti-slip control, see DSC 153
Anti-theft protection, lug bolts 221
Anti-theft protection, vehicle 71
App, BMW i Driver’s Guide 61
Approach control warning with City light braking
function 146
Approved axle load 247
Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication 8
Arrival time 129
Artificial engine noise 103
Assistance for the combustion engine 104
Assistance when driving off 156
ASSIST, hybrid system 104
AUTO intensity 172
Automatic climate control 170
Automatic Curb Monitor 93
Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger air‐
bags 141
Automatic deactivation of the high-voltage sys‐
tem 67
Automatic headlight control 135
Automatic locking 84
Automatic recirculated-air control 172
Automatic transmission, see Steptronic Sport
transmission 110
Automatic unlocking 84
Automatic vehicle wash 239
AUTO program, automatic climate control 171
AUTO program, intensity 172
Auto washing 239
Average fuel consumption 129
Average speed 129
Axle loads, weights 247
B
Backrest, seats 88
Band-aids, see First-aid kit 235
Battery, 12 volt 233
Battery replacement, vehicle battery 233
Battery replacement, vehicle remote control 72
Battery state indicator 118
Battery, vehicle 233
Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 236
Belts, safety belts 90
Bluetooth connection 54
Seite 250
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
BMW display key 74
BMW display key, malfunction 77
BMW eDRIVE 64
BMW Homepage 8
BMW i Driver’s Guide app 61
BMW Internet page 8
BMW maintenance system 230
Body work, see Working on the vehicle 67
Brake assistant 153
Brake discs, break-in 186
Brake force display 152
Brake lights, brake force display 152
Brake pads, break-in 186
Braking, information 189
Breakdown assistance 235
Break-in 186
Brightness of Control Display 51
Bulb replacement 232
Bulbs and lights 232
Button, Start/Stop 99
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 236
C
Calendar, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
California Proposition 65 Warning 11
Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐
gent Safety 145
Camera lenses, care 242
Camera, rearview camera 163
Camera, Side View 168
Camera, Top View 166
Care, displays 242
Care, vehicle 240
Care, washing the vehicle 239
Cargo 191
Cargo area 180
Cargo area, loading 192
Cargo cover 180
Cargo, stowing and securing 192
Carpet, care 242
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys‐
tem 188
CBS Condition Based Service 230
Center armrest 182
Center console 36
Central Information Display (CID), see Control
Display 38
Central locking system 78
Central screen, see Control Display 38
Changes, technical, see For Your Own
Safety 10
Changing wheels 219
Changing wheels/tires 216
CHARGE, energy recovery 104
Charge state indicator, high-voltage battery 118
Charging battery, see Vehicle charging 198
Charging cable storage 200
Charging cable, unlocking manually 201
Charging screen 117
Charging, see Charging the vehicle 198
Charging, see Vehicle charging 198
Charging status, see Display of the charging sta‐
tus 202
Charging the vehicle 198
Charging the vehicle, see Vehicle charging 198
Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐
ber 14
Check Control 120
Checking the oil level electronically 224
Children, seating position 95
Children, transporting safely 95
Child restraint system 95
Child restraint system LATCH 97
Child restraint systems, mounting 96
Child seat, mounting 96
Child seats 95
Chrome parts, care 241
Cleaning, displays 242
Climate control 170
Combination switch, see Turn signals 106
Combination switch, see Wiper system 107
Comfort Access 79
COMFORT program, driving dynamics 155
Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 53
Computer, see Onboard Computer 128
Seite 251
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Condensation on windows 173
Condensation under the vehicle 190
Condition Based Service CBS 230
Confirmation signal 84
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment and Communication 8
Connecting device 53
Connecting mobile phone 53
Connecting smartphone 53
Connecting telephone 53
Connections 53
Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
Contact with water, high-voltage system 67
Container for washer fluid 110
Control Display 38
Control Display, settings 49
Controller 39
Control systems, driving stability 153
Convenient opening with the remote control 71
Coolant 229
Coolant temperature 124
Cooling, maximum 171
Cooling system 229
Corrosion on brake discs 189
Cosmetic mirror 178
Coupling, see Pairing 53
Courtesy lights during unlocking 71
Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 71
Cruise control 157
Cruise control without distance control, see
Cruise control 157
Cruising range 125
Current fuel consumption 129
D
Damage, tires 216
Data memory 12
Data protection, settings 52
Data, technical 246
Date 50
Date display 125
Daytime running lights 136
DCC, see Cruise control 157
Deactivating drive-ready state 102
Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 173
Deleting personal data 52
Deletion of personal data 52
Departure times, stationary climate control 175
Destination distance 129
Device list 53
Digital clock 125
Dimensions 246
Dimmable exterior mirrors 93
Dimmable interior mirror 94
Direction indicator, see Turn signals 106
Display in windshield 131
Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 137
Displays 116
Displays, care 242
Displays, hybrid system 118
Disposal, vehicle battery 234
Distance control, see PDC 160
Distance to destination 129
Divided screen view, split screen 43
Door key, see Remote control 73
Drive-off assistant 156
Drive-off assistant, see DSC 153
Driver's door, LED 78
Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 145
Drive-ready state 99
Drive-ready state, activating 101
Drive-ready state, deactivate 102
Drive-ready state in detail 100
Driver profiles 81
Driver profiles, exporting profiles 83
Driver profiles, importing profiles 83
Driver’s Guide app, see BMW i Driver’s Guide
app 61
Driving Dynamics Control 155
Driving instructions, break-in 186
Driving instructions, eDRIVE drive system 186
Driving mode 155
Driving notes, general 188
Driving on racetracks 190
Driving stability control systems 153
Driving tips 188
Driving with combustion engine, POWER 104
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 153
Seite 252
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 154
DVD, Video, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 153
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 154
E
eBOOST 104
ECO PRO 194
ECO PRO display 194
ECO PRO driving mode 194
ECO PRO mode 194
ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction 195
eDRIVE drive system, driving instructions 186
eDRIVE, electric driving, see BMW eDRIVE 65
eDrive system, at a glance 64
Efficiency display, ECO PRO 195
Electric drive-ready state 101
Electric driving, ePOWER 102
Electric driving, MAX eDRIVE 103
Electric driving, see BMW eDRIVE 65
Electronic oil measurement 224
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 153
E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
Emergency release, fuel filler flap 208
Emergency Request 235
Emergency unlocking, charging cable 201
Emergency unlocking, tailgate 81
Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 114
Energy Control 129
Energy recovery, CHARGE 104
Engine coolant 229
Engine noise, artificial 103
Engine oil 224
Engine oil, adding 226
Engine oil change 228
Engine oil filler neck 226
Engine oil temperature 124
Engine oil types to add 227
Engine start, combustion engine 101
Engine start, jump-starting 236
Engine temperature 124
Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Com‐
munication 8
Entering a vehicle wash 239
ePOWER, electric driving 102
Equipment, interior 176
Error displays, see Check Control 120
ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 153
Exchanging wheels/tires 216
Exhaust gas system 188
Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 188
Exiting a vehicle wash 239
Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 93
Exterior mirrors 92
Exterior mirrors, malfunction 93
External start 236
External temperature display 124
External temperature warning 124
F
Failure message, see Check Control 120
False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 86
Fan, see Air flow 172
Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 90
Filler neck for engine oil 226
Finding charging stations, see Charging stations
and points of interest, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
First-aid kit 235
Flat tire, changing wheels 219
Flat tire message, TPM 144
Flat tire, repairing 218
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 142
Flat tire warning light, TPM 144
Flooding 188
Floor carpet, care 242
Floor mats, care 242
Fold-away position, wiper 109
Foot brake 189
For Your Own Safety 10
Front airbags 139
Seite 253
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Front armrest 182
Front beverage holder, front cup holder 182
Front bottle holder, see Front cup holder 182
Front can holder, see Front cup holder 182
Front cup holder 182
Front holder for beverages 182
Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deacti‐
vation 141
Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 142
Front seats 88
Fuel 210
Fuel cap 208
Fuel consumption, see Average fuel consump‐
tion 129
Fuel filler flap 208
Fuel gauge 124
Fuel quality 210
Fuel recommendation 210
Fuel, tank capacity 247
Fuse 234
G
Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal
Remote Control 176
Gasoline 210
Gear change, Steptronic Sport transmission 111
Gear shift indicator 126
Gearshift, see Steptronic Sport transmis‐
sion 110
General driving notes 188
General settings 49
Glare shield 178
Glove compartment 181
GPS geolocation, vehicle position 50
GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Gross vehicle weight, approved 247
H
Handbrake, see Parking brake 105
Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 177
Hands-free kit, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Hazard warning flashers 235
Head airbags 139
Headlight control, automatic 135
Headlight courtesy delay feature 135
Headlight courtesy delay feature, settings 84
Headlight courtesy delay feature via remote con‐
trol 72
Headlight flasher 106
Headlight glass 233
Headlights, care 240
Head restraints, front 92
Head-up Display 131
Head-up Display, care 242
Head-up Display, shift point indicator 133
Head-up Display, sport displays 132
Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 192
Height, vehicle 246
High-beam Assistant 136
High beams 106
High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assis‐
tant 136
High-voltage battery, charge state indicator 118
High-voltage battery, discharge 187
High-voltage system, automatic deactivation 67
High-voltage system, contact with water 67
High-voltage system, safety 67
Hills 189
Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 156
Homepage 8
Hood 80
Horn 34
Hot exhaust gas system 188
Hotline, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
HUD Head-up Display 131
Hybrid system, adapting to the course of the
road 120
Hybrid system, displays 118
Hybrid system, safety 67
Hydroplaning 188
I
Ice warning, see External temperature warn‐
ing 124
Icy roads, see External temperature warning 124
Identification marks, tires 214
Seite 254
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Identification number, see Vehicle identification
number 14
iDrive 38
Ignition key, see Remote control 73
Increasing the range 193
Indicator and warning lights, see Check Con‐
trol 120
Indicator light, see Check Control 120
Individual air distribution 172
Individual settings, see Driver profiles 81
Inductive charging, see Wireless charging, see
Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 8
Inflation pressure, tires 212
Info Display, see Onboard Computer 128
Information 8
Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 143
Instrument cluster 116
Instrument lighting 137
Integrated key 73
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 60
Intelligent emergency call 235
Intelligent Safety 145
Intended use 10
Intensity, AUTO program 172
Interior equipment 176
Interior lights 137
Interior lights during unlocking 71
Interior lights with the vehicle locked 71
Interior mirror 92
Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 94
Interior mirror, manually dimmable 93
Interior motion sensor 86
Internet page 8
Interval display, service requirements 125
Interval mode 108
In the vicinity of the center console 36
In the vicinity of the roofliner 37
In the vicinity of the steering wheel 34
J
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 221
Jam protection system, windows 87
Joystick, Steptronic Sport transmission 111
Jump-starting 236
K
Key/remote control 73
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 79
Key, see Remote control 70
Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 112
Knee airbag 140
L
Label on recommended tires 217
Language, on the Control Display 49
Laser high beams 137
LATCH child restraint fixing system 97
Launch Control 114
Leather, care 241
LED in the driver's door 78
Length, vehicle 246
Level 1 charging 204
Level 1 charging cable 200
Level 2 charging cable 200
Light 134
Light-alloy wheels, care 241
Lighting 134
Light replacement, see Bulb replacement 232
Light switch 134
List of all messages 51
Load 192
Loading 191
Location, vehicle position 50
Locking, automatic 84
Locking, settings 83
Longer idle phases 242
Long idle times and long-term vehicle stor‐
age 242
Long-term vehicle storage 242
Low beams 134
Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assis‐
tant 136
Lug bolt lock 221
M
Maintaining charge state 103
Maintenance 230
Maintenance requirements 230
Seite 255
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Maintenance, service requirements 125
Maintenance system, BMW 230
Make-up mirror 178
Malfunction displays, see Check Control 120
Manual air distribution 172
Manual air flow 172
Manual mode, transmission 113
Manual operation, fuel filler flap 208
Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol 161
Manual operation, rearview camera 164
Manual operation, Top View 167
Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Master key, see Remote control 73
Matte finish 240
MAX eDRIVE, electric driving 103
Maximum cooling 171
Maximum speed, display 126
Maximum speed, winter tires 218
Measurement, units of 50
Medical kit 235
Menu in instrument cluster 128
Menus 40
Menus, operating, iDrive 38
Messages 51
Messages, see Check Control 120
Microfilter 173
Minimum tread, tires 216
Mirror 92
Mobile communication devices in the vehi‐
cle 188
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own
Safety 10
Moisture in headlight 233
Monitor, see Control Display 38
Mounting of child restraint systems 96
MP3 player, see Audio, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 34
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for Nav‐
igation, Entertainment, Communication 8
N
Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints 92
Neutral cleaner, see Wheel cleaner 241
New wheels and tires 216
Notes, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 8
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 231
OBD, see OBD Onboard Diagnosis 231
Obstacle marking, rearview camera 165
Octane rating, see Recommended fuel
grade 211
Odometer 124
Office, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communication 8
Oil 224
Oil, adding 226
Oil change 228
Oil change interval, service requirements 125
Oil filler neck 226
Oil types to add, engine 227
Old batteries, disposal 234
Onboard Computer 128
Onboard literature, printed 60
Online Entertainment, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Online Owner's Manual 62
Opening and closing 70
Operating concept, iDrive 38
Operating via iDrive 40
Operating with the Controller 40
Operation via touchscreen 41
Optional equipment 9
Outside air, see Automatic recirculated-air con‐
trol 172
Overheating of engine, see Coolant tempera‐
ture 124
Owner's Manual media 60
Owner's Manual, printed 60
Seite 256
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
P
Paint, vehicle 240
Panic alarm, see Panic mode 85
Panic mode 85
Park Distance Control PDC 160
Parked vehicle, condensation 190
Parked vehicle ventilation, see Stationary climate
control 174
Parking aid, see PDC 160
Parking brake 105
Parking lights 134
Parts and accessories 10
Passenger's side mirror, tilting downward 93
Pathway lines, rearview camera 164
PDC Park Distance Control 160
Pedestrian protection 103
Performance Control 155
Personal profile, see Driver profiles 81
Person warning with City light braking func‐
tion 149
Plastic, care 241
POWER, driving with combustion engine 104
Power failure 234
Power windows 86
Pressure, tires 212
Printed onboard literature 60
Profiles, see Driver profiles 81
Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 45
Protective function, windows 87
Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 39
Q
Quick charging cable, see Level 2 charging ca‐
ble 200
R
Racetrack operation 190
Radiator fluid 229
Radio-operated key, see Remote control 73
Radio-operated remote control, opening/clos‐
ing 70
Radio-ready state 99
Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communication 8
Rain sensor 108
Rear beverage holder, rear cup holder 182
Rear bottle holder, see Rear cup holder 182
Rear can holder, see Rear Cup holder 182
Rear cup holder 182
Rear holder for beverages 182
Rearview camera 163
Rear window defroster 173
Recirculated-air filter 173
Recirculated-air mode 172
Recommended fuel grade 211
Recommended tire brands 217
Refueling 207
Remaining range 125
Remote control/key 73
Remote control, additional 73
Remote control for audio, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
cation 8
Remote control, loss 73
Remote control, malfunction 73
Remote control, opening/closing 70
Remote control, universal 176
Remote control with display 74
Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Replacing wheels/tires 216
Reporting safety malfunctions 15
RES button, see Cruise control 157
Reserve warning, see Range 125
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 143
Retreaded tires 217
Roadside parking lights 134
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 177
RON recommended fuel grade 211
Roofliner 37
Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication 8
Rubber components, care 241
Seite 257
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
S
Safe braking 189
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front
passenger seat 91
Safety belts 90
Safety belts, care 242
Safety of the high-voltage system 67
Safety of the hybrid system 67
Safety systems, airbags 139
Screen, see Control Display 38
Seat heating, front 90
Seating position for children 95
Seats, front 88
Securing cargo 192
Selection list in instrument cluster 128
Selector lever, Steptronic Sport transmis‐
sion 111
Sensors, care 242
Service and warranty 11
Service requirements, Condition Based Service
CBS 230
Service requirements, display 125
Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Communica‐
tion 8
SET button, see Cruise control 157
Settings, locking/unlocking 83
Settings on the Control Display 49
Shift paddles on the steering wheel 113
Shift point indicator, Head-up Display 133
Side airbags 139
Side View 168
Signaling, horn 34
Signals when unlocking 84
Sitting safely 88
Size 246
Smallest turning radius 246
SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
cation 8
SMS text message, supplementary 123
Snow chains 218
Socket 178
Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 231
Software update 58
SOS button 235
Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Speed, average 129
Speed Limit Info 126
Speed Limit Info, Onboard Computer 129
Speed limits, display 126
Speed warning 130
Split screen 43
Sport displays, Head-up Display 132
Sport program, vehicle 113
Stability control systems 153
Standard charging cable, see Level 1 charging
cable 200
Standard charging, see Level 1 charging 204
Standard equipment 9
Standby state off 100
Standby state on 99
Start/Stop button 99
Starting the combustion engine 101
Stationary climate control 174
Stationary climate control, settings 84
Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Status control display, tires 143
Status information, iDrive 44
Status of Owner's Manual 9
Status, vehicle 133
Steering wheel, adjusting 94
Steptronic Sport transmission 110
Storage compartments 181
Storage compartments, locations 181
Storage, tires 218
Storing the charging cable, see Storage 200
Storing the vehicle 242
Stowing and securing cargo 192
Suitable devices 53
Suitable mobile phones 53
Summer tires, tread 215
Sun visor 178
Supplementary SMS text message 123
Surround View 163
Switch for driving dynamics 155
Switch, see Cockpit 34
Symbols 9
Symbols in the status field 44
Seite 258
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
SYNC program, automatic climate control 173
T
Tachometer 124
Tailgate, emergency unlocking 81
Tailgate opening 81
Tailgate via remote control 71
Tail lights, see Bulb replacement 232
Tank unlocking, see Tank vent 207
Tank vent 207
Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 10
Technical data 246
Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 8
Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Television, TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Temperature, automatic climate control 171
Temperature display for external tempera‐
ture 124
Temperature, engine oil 124
Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 85
Tilt alarm sensor 86
Time 49
Time of arrival 129
Tire damage 216
Tire identification marks 214
Tire inflation pressure 212
Tire pressure 212
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 142
Tires, changing 216
Tires, everything on wheels and tires 212
Tire tread 215
Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
tainment and Communication 8
Top View 166
Total range 125
Total vehicle weight 247
Touchpad 43
Touchscreen 41
Towing 236
Tow-starting 236
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 142
Traction control 154
TRACTION, driving dynamics 154
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 114
Transmission, see Steptronic Sport transmis‐
sion 110
Transporting children safely 95
Tread, tires 215
Trip computer 130
Triple turn signal activation 106
Trip odometer 124
Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 124
Trunk emergency unlocking 81
Turning radius 246
Turning radius lines, rearview camera 165
Turn signals, operation 106
TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication 8
U
Unintentional alarm 86
Units of measurement 50
Universal remote control 176
Unlocking, automatic 84
Unlocking, settings 83
Updates made after the editorial deadline 9
Upholstery care 241
USB connection 56
USB interface, general information 179
USB port, see USB interface 179
Use, intended 10
Using a smartphone via voice activation 46
V
Vanity mirror 178
Vehicle battery 233
Vehicle battery, replacing 233
Vehicle, break-in 186
Vehicle care 240
Vehicle care products 240
Vehicle features and options 9
Vehicle identification number 14
Vehicle jack 221
Vehicle key, see Remote control 73
Seite 259
Everything from A to Z
REFERENCE
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Vehicle paint 240
Vehicle position, vehicle location 50
Vehicle status 133
Vehicle wash 239
Vehicle, washing 239
Ventilation 173
Venting, see Stationary climate control 174
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 14
Voice activation system 46
Voice command response, see Owner's Hand‐
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
cation 8
W
Warning and indicator lights, see Check Con‐
trol 120
Warning displays, see Check Control 120
Warning messages, see Check Control 120
Warning triangle 235
Warranty 10
Washer fluid 110
Washer nozzles, windshield 109
Washer system 107
Washing the vehicle 239
Water, high-voltage system 67
Water on roads 188
Weights 247
Welcome lights 135
Welcome lights during unlocking 71
What to do after an accident 238
Wheelbase, vehicle 246
Wheel cleaner 241
Wheels, changing 216
Wheels, everything on wheels and tires 212
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 142
Width, vehicle 246
Windows, powered 86
Windshield washer fluid 110
Windshield washer nozzles 109
Windshield washer system 107
Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 107
Winter storage, care 242
Winter tires, suitable tires 217
Winter tires, tread 215
Wiper 107
Wiper blades, replacing 232
Wiper fluid 110
Wiper, fold-away position 109
Wiper system 107
Wireless charging dock, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Wireless charging, see Wireless charging, see
Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 8
Word match concept, navigation 41
Working on the body, see Working on the vehi‐
cle 67
Working on the high-voltage system, see Work‐
ing on the vehicle 67
Seite 260
REFERENCE
Everything from A to Z
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
*BL298929600R*
01402989296 ue
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
BMW i DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.
Your customized Owner's Manual as an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
*BL298929600R*
01402989296 ue
Online Edition for Part no. 01402989296 - II/18
